Sun Microsystems Server V490 User Manual

Sun Fire V490 Server  
Administration Guide  
Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
www.sun.com  
Part No. 817-3951-10  
August 2004, Revision A  
Submit comments about this document at: http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface xxv  
Part I  
Installation  
1
2
Part II  
Background  
2. System Overview  
About the Sun Fire V490 Server  
Locating Front Panel Features 12  
9
9
Security Lock and Top Panel Lock 12  
LED Status Indicators 13  
Power Button 15  
System Control Switch 15  
Locating Back Panel Features 16  
About Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability Features 19  
Hot-Pluggable and Hot-Swappable Components 19  
Power Supply Redundancy 20  
Environmental Monitoring and Control 20  
Contents  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic System Recovery 21  
MPxIO 21  
Sun Remote System Control Software 22  
Hardware Watchdog Mechanism and XIR 23  
3. Hardware Configuration 25  
About Hot-Pluggable and Hot-Swappable Components 26  
Power Supplies 26  
Disk Drives 27  
About the CPU/ Memory Boards 27  
About the Memory Modules 28  
Memory Interleaving 30  
Independent Memory Subsystems 30  
Configuration Rules 31  
About the PCI Cards and Buses 31  
Configuration Rules 33  
About the System Controller (SC) Card 33  
Configuration Rules 35  
About Hardware Jumpers 36  
PCI Riser Board Jumpers 36  
About the Power Supplies 38  
Configuration Rule 39  
About the Fan Trays 39  
Configuration Rule 41  
About FC-AL Technology 41  
About the FC-AL Backplane 42  
Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Rules 43  
About the HSSDC FC-AL Port 43  
About the FC-AL Host Adapters 44  
Configuration Rules 44  
About the Internal Disk Drives 44  
4. Network Interfaces and System Firmware 47  
About the Network Interfaces 47  
About Redundant Network Interfaces 48  
About the okPrompt 49  
What You Should Know About Accessing the okPrompt 50  
Ways of Reaching the okPrompt 50  
For More Information 51  
About OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring 52  
Enabling or Disabling the OpenBoot Environmental Monitor 52  
Automatic System Shutdown 53  
OpenBoot Environmental Status Information 53  
About OpenBoot Emergency Procedures 54  
Stop-A Functionality 54  
Stop-D Functionality 54  
Stop-F Functionality 55  
Stop-N Functionality 55  
About Automatic System Recovery 55  
Auto-Boot Options 56  
Error Handling Summary 57  
Reset Scenarios 58  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Manually Configuring Devices 59  
Deconfiguring Devices vs. Slots 59  
5. System Administration Software 63  
About System Administration Software 63  
About Multipathing Software 64  
For More Information 65  
About Volume Management Software 65  
Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO) 66  
RAID Concepts 66  
For More Information 68  
About Sun Cluster Software 69  
For More Information 69  
6. Diagnostic Tools 73  
About the Diagnostic Tools 73  
About Diagnostics and the Boot Process 77  
Prologue: System Controller Boot 78  
Stage One: OpenBoot Firmware and POST 78  
Stage Two: OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests 85  
Stage Three: The Operating System 93  
Tools and the Boot Process: A Summary 99  
About Isolating Faults in the System 100  
Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Monitoring the System 101  
Monitoring the System Using Remote System Control Software 102  
Monitoring the System Using Sun Management Center 103  
About Exercising the System 105  
Exercising the System Using SunVTS Software 106  
Exercising the System Using Hardware Diagnostic Suite 108  
Part III  
Instructions  
7. Configuring Console Access 119  
How to Avoid Electrostatic Discharge 120  
How to Power On the System 122  
How to Power Off the System 125  
How to Get to the okPrompt 126  
How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable 127  
How to Access the System Console via tipConnection 129  
How to Modify the /etc/remoteFile 131  
How to Verify Serial Port Settings 132  
How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console 133  
How to Configure a Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console 135  
How to Initiate a Reconfiguration Boot 138  
Reference for System Console OpenBoot Variable Settings 141  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device 143  
9. Configuring System Firmware 153  
How to Enable OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring 154  
How to Disable OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring 154  
How to Obtain OpenBoot Environmental Status Information 155  
How to Enable the Watchdog Mechanism and Its Options 156  
How to Enable ASR 157  
How to Disable ASR 158  
How to Obtain ASR Status Information 158  
How to Redirect the System Console to the System Controller 159  
How to Restore the Local System Console 161  
10. Isolating Failed Parts 167  
How to Operate the Locator LED 168  
How to Put the Server in Service Mode 170  
How to Put the Server in Normal Mode 171  
How to Isolate Faults Using LEDs 172  
How to Isolate Faults Using POST Diagnostics 175  
How to Isolate Faults Using Interactive OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests 177  
How to View Diagnostic Test Results After the Fact 179  
How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables 180  
Reference for Choosing a Fault Isolation Tool 181  
Contents  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Monitoring the System 185  
How to Monitor the System Using Sun Management Center Software 186  
A. Connector Pinouts 209  
Serial Port Connector 210  
Serial Port Connector Diagram 210  
Serial Port Connector Signals 210  
USB Connector 211  
USB Connector Diagram 211  
USB Connector Signals 211  
Twisted-Pair Ethernet Connector 212  
TPE Connector Diagram 212  
TPE Connector Signals 212  
SC Ethernet Connector 213  
SC Ethernet Connector Diagram 213  
SC Ethernet Connector Signals 213  
SC Serial Connector 214  
SC Serial Connector Diagram 214  
SC Serial Connector Signals 214  
FC-AL Port HSSDC Connector 215  
HSSDC Connector Diagram 215  
HSSDC Connector Signal 215  
Contents  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B. System Specifications 217  
Physical Specifications 217  
Electrical Specifications 218  
Agency Compliance Specifications 220  
Clearance and Service Access Specifications 220  
C. Safety Precautions 221  
Index 239  
Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
FIGURE 2-1  
FIGURE 2-2  
FIGURE 2-3  
FIGURE 2-4  
FIGURE 3-1  
FIGURE 3-2  
FIGURE 3-3  
FIGURE 3-4  
FIGURE 3-5  
FIGURE 3-6  
FIGURE 3-7  
FIGURE 3-8  
FIGURE 6-1  
FIGURE 6-2  
FIGURE 6-3  
FIGURE 6-4  
FIGURE 10-1  
SC Card Ports 35  
Boot PROM and IDPROM 79  
POST Diagnostic Running Across FRUs 81  
OpenBoot Diagnostics Interactive Test Menu 87  
Choosing a Tool to Isolate Hardware Faults 182  
Figures  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE 2-1  
TABLE 2-2  
TABLE 2-3  
TABLE 2-4  
TABLE 2-5  
TABLE 2-6  
TABLE 3-1  
TABLE 3-2  
Ethernet LEDs 17  
Power Supply LEDs 18  
Association Between Processors and DIMM Groups 30  
PCI Bus Characteristics, Associated Bridge Chips, Centerplane Devices,  
TABLE 3-3  
TABLE 3-4  
TABLE 4-1  
TABLE 5-1  
TABLE 5-2  
TABLE 6-1  
TABLE 6-2  
TABLE 6-3  
TABLE 6-4  
TABLE 6-5  
TABLE 6-6  
TABLE 6-7  
Keywords for the test-argsOpenBoot Configuration Variable 86  
Diagnostic Tool Availability 99  
FRU Coverage of Fault Isolating Tools 100  
FRUs Not Directly Isolated by Diagnostic Tools 101  
What RSC Software Monitors 102  
Tables  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE 6-8  
TABLE 6-9  
TABLE 6-10  
TABLE 6-11  
TABLE 6-12  
TABLE 6-13  
TABLE 7-1  
TABLE 7-2  
TABLE 11-1  
TABLE 11-2  
TABLE 12-1  
Ways of Accessing the okPrompt 127  
OpenBoot Configuration Variables That Affect the System Console 141  
Using Solaris Information Display Commands 197  
Using OpenBoot Information Commands 199  
Useful SunVTS Tests to Run on a Sun Fire V490 Server 205  
Tables  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
Compliance Model Number:  
Product Family Name:  
490  
Sun Fire V490  
EMC  
European Union  
This equipment complies with the following requirements of the EMC Directive 89/ 336/ EEC:  
As Telecommunication Network Equipment (TNE) in both Telecom Centers and Other Than Telecom Centers per (as applicable):  
EN300-386 V.1.3.1 (09-2001) Required Limits:  
EN55022/ CISPR22  
EN61000-3-2  
EN61000-3-3  
EN61000-4-2  
EN61000-4-3  
EN61000-4-4  
EN61000-4-5  
EN61000-4-6  
EN61000-4-11  
Class A  
Pass  
Pass  
6 kV (Direct), 8 kV (Air)  
3 V/ m 80-1000MHz, 10 V/ m 800-960 MHz and 1400-2000 MHz  
1 kV AC and DC Power Lines, 0.5 kV Signal Lines,  
2 kV AC Line-Gnd, 1 kV AC Line-Line and Outdoor Signal Lines, 0.5 kV Indoor Signal Lines > 10m.  
3 V  
Pass  
As Information Technology Equipment (ITE) Class A per (as applicable):  
EN55022:1998/ CISPR22:1997  
EN55024:1998 Required Limits:  
Class A  
EN61000-4-2  
EN61000-4-3  
4 kV (Direct), 8 kV (Air)  
3 V/ m  
EN61000-4-4  
1 kV AC Power Lines, 0.5 kV Signal and DC Power Lines  
EN61000-4-5  
1 kV AC Line-Line and Outdoor Signal Lines, 2 kV AC Line-Gnd, 0.5 kV DC Power Lines  
EN61000-4-6  
3 V  
EN61000-4-8  
1 A/ m  
Pass  
Pass  
Pass  
EN61000-4-11  
EN61000-3-2:1995 + A1, A2, A14  
EN61000-3-3:1995  
Safety: This equipment complies with the following requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/ 23/ EEC:  
EC Type Examination Certificates:  
EN 60950-1:2001  
TÜV Rheinland Certificate No. S72040123  
IEC 60950-1:2001  
CB Scheme Certificate No. –on file–  
Evaluated to all CB Countries  
UL 60950-1, First Edition; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-00  
FDA DHHS Accession Number (Monitor Only)  
File: E113363  
Supplementary Information: This product was tested and complies with all the requirements for the CE Mark.  
/ S/  
Burt Hemp  
Manager, Product Compliance  
July 5, 2004  
Donald Cameron  
Program Manager  
July 5, 2004  
Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
One Network Circle, UBUR03-213  
Burlington, MA 01803  
USA  
Sun Microsystems Scotland, Limited  
Blackness Road, Phase I, Main Bldg  
Springfield, EH49 7LR  
Scotland, United Kingdom  
Tel: 781-442-2118  
Fax: 781-442-1673  
Tel: +44 1 506 672 539  
Fax: +44 1 506 670 011  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regulatory Compliance Statements  
Your Sun product is marked to indicate its compliance class:  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) — USA  
Industry Canada Equipment Standard for Digital Equipment (ICES-003) — Canada  
Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) — Japan  
Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection (BSMI) — Taiwan  
Please read the appropriate section that corresponds to the marking on your Sun product before attempting to install the  
product.  
FCC Class A Notice  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is  
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required  
to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Shielded Cables: Connections between the workstation and peripherals must be made using shielded cables to comply  
with FCC radio frequency emission limits. Networking connections can be made using unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cables.  
Modifications: Any modifications made to this device that are not approved by Sun Microsystems, Inc. may void the  
authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment.  
FCC Class B Notice  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee  
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ television technician for help.  
Shielded Cables: Connections between the workstation and peripherals must be made using shielded cables in order to  
maintain compliance with FCC radio frequency emission limits. Networking connections can be made using unshielded  
twisted pair (UTP) cables.  
Modifications: Any modifications made to this device that are not approved by Sun Microsystems, Inc. may void the  
authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICES-003 Class A Notice - Avis NMB-003, Classe A  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
ICES-003 Class B Notice - Avis NMB-003, Classe B  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
xviii  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BSMI Class A Notice  
The following statement is applicable to products shipped to Taiwan and marked as Class A on the product compliance  
label.  
Regulatory Compliance Statements  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xx  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
The Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide is intended to be used by experienced  
system administrators. It includes general descriptive information about the  
Sun Fire™ V490 server and detailed instructions for installing, configuring, and  
administering the server and for diagnosing problems with the server. To use the  
information in this manual—particularly the instructional chapters—you must have  
working knowledge of computer network concepts and terms, and advanced  
familiarity with the Solaris™ Operating System.  
Before You Read This Book  
While the first part of this manual focuses on installation of the Sun Fire V490 server,  
it does not deal with mounting the server in a cabinet or 2-post rack. For those  
instructions, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Setup and Rackmounting Guide.  
Rackmounting instructions are also printed on labels on the server chassis.  
Follow the instructions for mounting the server in a cabinet or 2-post rack before  
continuing with the installation and configuration instructions in this manual.  
How This Book Is Organized  
The Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide is divided into three parts:  
Part One – Installation  
Part Two – Background  
Part Three – Instructions  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each part of the book is divided into chapters.  
Part One  
Chapter 1 describes and provides instructions for Sun Fire V490 server installation.  
Part Two  
Chapter 2 presents an illustrated overview of the server and a description of the  
servers reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) features.  
Chapter 3 describes and illustrates major system hardware.  
Chapter 4 describes the network interfaces and system firmware, including  
OpenBoot™ environmental monitoring.  
Chapter 5 offers conceptual information (not instructions) relating to system  
administration tasks.  
Chapter 6 is a discussion of diagnostic tools.  
Part Three  
Chapter 7 provides instructions for configuring system devices.  
Chapter 8 provides instructions for configuring network interfaces and  
the boot drive.  
Chapter 9 provides instructions for configuring system firmware.  
Chapter 10 provides instructions for isolating failed parts.  
Chapter 11 provides instructions for monitoring the system.  
Chapter 12 provides instructions for exercising the system.  
This manual also includes the following reference appendixes:  
Appendix A details connector pinouts.  
Appendix B provides tables of various system specifications.  
Appendix C deals with safety precautions.  
xxii Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using UNIX Commands  
®
This document might not contain information on basic UNIX commands and  
procedures such as shutting down the system, booting the system, and configuring  
devices. Refer to the following for this information:  
Documentation that you received with your system  
Solaris Operating System documentation, which is at http://docs.sun.com  
Typographic Conventions  
Typeface*  
Meaning  
Examples  
AaBbCc123  
The names of commands, files,  
and directories; on-screen  
computer output  
Edit your.loginfile.  
Use ls -ato list all files.  
% You have mail.  
AaBbCc123  
What you type, when  
contrasted with on-screen  
computer output  
% su  
Password:  
AaBbCc123  
Book titles, new words or terms, Read Chapter 6 in the Users Guide.  
words to be emphasized  
These are called class options.  
You must be superuser to do this.  
AaBbCc123  
Command-line variable; replace To delete a file, type rmfilename.  
with a real name or value  
* The settings on your browser might differ from these settings.  
Preface  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shell Prompts  
Shell  
Prompt  
C shell  
machine-name%  
C shell superuser  
machine-name#  
Bourne shell and Korn shell  
Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser  
$
#
Related Documentation  
Application  
Title  
Part Number / Location  
Site Planning  
Site Planning Guide for Entry-Level  
Servers, Version 1.5  
816-1613-15  
Documentation CD  
Rack installation  
Sun Fire V490 Server Setup and  
Rackmounting Guide  
817-3959-10  
Documentation CD  
Sun Fire V490 Server 4-Post  
817-6884-10  
Rackmounting Overview  
Printed, included in box  
Parts installation and  
removal  
Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation  
and Removal Guide  
817-3952-10  
Documentation CD  
Remote System  
Control (RSC)  
software  
Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2  
Users Guide  
816-3314-12  
Documentation CD  
Sun Validation Test  
Suite (SunVTS)  
software  
SunVTS 5.0 Users Guide  
816-1666-10  
http://docs.sun.com  
SunVTS 5.0 Test Reference Manual  
816-1667-10  
http://docs.sun.com  
Sun Management  
Center software  
Sun Management Center 3.5 Installation  
and Configuration Guide  
816-2678-10  
http://www.sun.com/  
sunmanagementcenter  
Sun Management Center 3.5 Users  
Guide  
816-2716-10  
http://www.sun.com/  
sunmanagementcenter  
xxiv Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application  
Title  
Part Number / Location  
Firmware  
configuration  
OpenBoot PROM Enhancements for  
Diagnostic Operation  
817-6957-10  
Documentation CD  
OpenBoot 4.x Command Reference  
Manual  
816-1177-10  
http://docs.sun.com  
Late-breaking  
information  
Sun Fire V490 Server Product Notes  
817-4193-10  
Documentation CD  
Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2.2  
Release Notes  
816-3995-11  
Documentation CD  
SunVTS README file  
/opt/SUNWvts/  
Accessing Sun Documentation  
You can view, print, or purchase a broad selection of Sun documentation, including  
localized versions, at:  
http://www.sun.com/documentation  
Third-Party Web Sites  
Sun is not responsible for the availability of third-party web sites mentioned in this  
document. Sun does not endorse and is not responsible or liable for any content,  
advertising, products, or other materials that are available on or through such sites  
or resources. Sun will not be responsible or liable for any actual or alleged damage  
or loss caused by or in connection with the use of or reliance on any such content,  
goods, or services that are available on or through such sites or resources.  
Preface  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contacting Sun Technical Support  
If you have technical questions about this product that are not answered in this  
document, go to:  
http://www.sun.com/service/contacting  
Sun Welcomes Your Comments  
Sun is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and  
suggestions. You can submit your comments by going to:  
http://www.sun.com/hwdocs/feedback  
Please include the title and part number of your document with your feedback:  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide, part number 817-3951-10  
xxvi Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PART  
I Installation  
This one-chapter part of the Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide provides  
instructions for installing your server.  
For illustrated background information about the hardware and software  
components of the Sun Fire V490 server, see the chapters in Part Two – Background.  
For detailed instructions on how to configure and administer the server, and how to  
perform various diagnostic routines to resolve problems with the server, see the  
chapters in Part Three – Instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
1
Sun Fire V490 Server Installation  
running. This chapter explains some of what you need to do, and points you to the  
appropriate section in this guide, or to other manuals for more information.  
The following information is covered in this chapter:  
“About the Parts Shipped to You” on page 1  
“How to Install the Sun Fire V490 Server” on page 2  
About the Parts Shipped to You  
Standard features for Sun Fire V490 systems are installed at the factory. However, if  
you ordered options such as a monitor, or keyboard and mouse, these will be  
shipped to you separately.  
In addition, you should have received the media and documentation for all  
appropriate system software. Check that you have received everything you ordered.  
Note – Inspect the shipping carton for evidence of physical damage. If a shipping  
carton is damaged, request that the carriers agent be present when the carton is  
opened. Keep all contents and packing material for the agents inspection.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Unpacking instructions are printed on the outside of the shipping carton.  
How to Install the Sun Fire V490 Server  
Each step in this procedure refers you to a particular document or to a section of this  
guide for instructions. Complete each step in the order listed.  
The best way to begin your installation of a Sun Fire V490 server is by completing  
the rackmounting and setup procedures in the Sun Fire V490 Server Setup and  
Rackmounting Guide. This guide is shipped with your server in the ship kit box.  
Before You Begin  
The Sun Fire V490 server is a general-purpose server, which you can use for many  
types of applications. Exactly how you set up your server depends on what you  
want it to do.  
This procedure is intended to be as “generic” as possible, so as to cover the needs of  
most sites. Even so, you need to make certain decisions to complete the procedure:  
On which network or networks do you intend the machine to operate?  
2
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You need to provide specific networking information about the server when you  
install the Solaris™ Operating System (Solaris OS). For background information  
about network support, see “About the Network Interfaces” on page 47.  
How do you want to use and configure the machines internal disks?  
For background information about the internal disks, see “About the Internal  
Disk Drives” on page 45.  
What software do you intend to load?  
Software included in the Solaris media kit or other software products may impose  
certain disk space or disk partitioning requirements. Refer to the documentation  
accompanying this software to determine those requirements.  
Note – A minimal Solaris 8 installation requires at least 64 Mbytes of memory and  
at least 1.7 Gbytes of disk space.  
Once you have answered these questions, you are ready to begin the installation.  
If you have completed the procedures in the Sun Fire V490 Server Setup and  
Rackmounting Guide, begin this procedure at Step 7.  
1. Verify that you have received all the parts of your system.  
See “About the Parts Shipped to You” on page 1.  
2. Install the system into either a 2-post rack or a 4-post cabinet, following all  
instructions in the Sun Fire V490 Server Setup and Rackmounting Guide.  
You must set up a terminal or console in order to install the Solaris OS and any  
application software.  
You can either establish a tipconnection from another server or use an  
alphanumeric (ASCII) terminal connected to the serial port. See “About  
Communicating With the System” on page 69 for background information, and then  
refer to the following procedures in this guide:  
“How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133  
Chapter 1 Sun Fire V490 Server Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
Note – To set up a serial connection using a Sun workstation or an ASCII terminal,  
insert the RJ-45 serial cable into the DB-25 adapter (Sun part number 530-2889-03)  
supplied in the ship kit. Plug in the adapter to the DB-25 serial connector on the  
terminal or the Sun workstation. If you are using a network terminal server (NTS),  
refer to “Serial Port Connector” on page 210 to determine whether you need to use  
the adapter.  
4. Install any optional components shipped with your system.  
If you ordered options that are not factory-installed, see the Sun Fire V490 Server  
Parts Installation and Removal Guide for installation instructions.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
Caution – The AC power cords provide a discharge path for static electricity, so  
they must remain plugged in when you install or handle internal components.  
5. Configure the network interface(s).  
The Sun Fire V490 server provides two on-board Ethernet interfaces, which reside on  
the system centerplane and conform to the IEEE 802.3z Ethernet standard. Two back  
panel ports with RJ-45 connectors provide access to the on-board Ethernet interfaces.  
A variety of supported Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) cards can provide  
connections to additional Ethernet or other network types. For details about network  
interface options and configuration procedures, see:  
“About the Network Interfaces” on page 47  
“How to Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
Note – The system controller (SC) card serial and Ethernet interfaces are available  
only after you install the operating system software and the Remote System Control  
(RSC) software. Consult the Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide for more  
details about configuring these interfaces.  
4
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Turn on power to your server.  
See “How to Power On the System” on page 122. For information about the LED  
status indicators that appear during power-on, see “LED Status Indicators” on  
page 13.  
7. Install and boot the Solaris OS software.  
See the installation instructions provided with your Solaris software. You should  
also consult the Solaris on Sun Hardware Platform Guide for your particular operating  
system which contains platform-specific information about software installation.  
8. Set any desired OpenBoot PROM configuration options.  
You can control several aspects of system behavior through OpenBoot™ PROM  
commands and configuration variables. For additional details, see Chapter 9.  
9. (Optional) Load additional software from the Solaris media kit.  
The Solaris media kit (sold separately) includes several CDs containing software to  
help you operate, configure, and administer your server. See the documentation  
provided with the Solaris media kit for a complete listing of included software and  
detailed installation instructions.  
10. Load online documentation from the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
You can copy the CD contents to a local or network disk drive, or view the  
documentation directly from the CD. See the installation instructions that  
accompany the CD in the Sun Fire V490 documentation set.  
11. (Optional) Install and configure Sun Remote System Control (RSC) software.  
Sun RSC software is included on the Solaris Software Supplement CD for your  
specific Solaris release. For installation instructions, see the Solaris Sun Hardware  
Platform Guide for the particular operating system provided in the Solaris media kit.  
For information about configuring and using RSC, see the Sun Remote System  
Controller (RSC) Users Guide provided on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Once you install RSC software, you can configure the system to use RSC as the  
system console. For detailed instructions, see “How to Redirect the System Console  
12. (Optional) Install a local graphics terminal.  
After you have installed the Sun Fire V490 system and the Solaris OS, if you prefer  
to use a graphics terminal as your system console, you can install a graphics card  
and attach a monitor, mouse, and keyboard to the server. See “How to Configure a  
Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console” on page 135.  
Chapter 1 Sun Fire V490 Server Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
     
6
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PART  
II Background  
The five chapters within this part of the Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide  
explain and illustrate in detail the various components of the servers hardware,  
software, and firmware. Use the chapters as a guided tour through the panels,  
cables, cards, switches, and so forth that make up your server.  
For detailed instructions on how to configure and administer the server, and how to  
perform various diagnostic routines to resolve problems with the server, see the  
chapters in Part Three – Instructions.  
Chapters included in Part Two are:  
Chapter 2 – System Overview  
Chapter 3 – Hardware Configuration  
Chapter 4 – Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Chapter 5 – System Administration Software  
Chapter 6 – Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
2
System Overview  
features.  
The following information is covered in this chapter:  
“About the Sun Fire V490 Server” on page 9  
“Locating Front Panel Features” on page 12  
“Locating Back Panel Features” on page 16  
“LED Status Indicators” on page 13  
“About Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability Features” on page 19  
About the Sun Fire V490 Server  
The Sun Fire V490 system is a high-performance, shared memory, symmetric  
®
multiprocessing server that supports up to four UltraSPARC IV processors. The  
UltraSPARC IV processor incorporates a chip with multithreading (CMT) design  
featuring two threads on each physical processor. The UltraSPARC IV processor  
®
implements the SPARC V9 Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) and the Visual  
Instruction Set (VIS™) extensions that accelerate multimedia, networking,  
encryption, and Java™ software processing.  
The system, which is mountable in a 4-post cabinet or 2-post rack, measures 8.75  
inches (5 rack units - RU) high, 17.5 inches wide, and (without its plastic bezel) 24  
inches deep (22.225 cm x 44.7 cm x 60.96 cm). The system weighs between 79 and 97  
lbs (35.83 to 44 kg).  
Processing power is provided by up to two dual CPU/ Memory boards. Each board  
incorporates:  
Two UltraSPARC IV 1050-MHz processors  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
per processor  
Slots for up to 16 dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)—eight per processor  
A fully configured Sun Fire V490 system includes a total of four UltraSPARC IV  
processors residing on two CPU/ Memory boards. For more information, see “About  
the CPU/ Memory Boards” on page 27.  
System main memory is provided by up to 32 DIMMs, which operate at a 75-MHz  
clock frequency. The system supports 512-Mbyte and 1-Gbyte DIMMs. Total system  
memory is shared by all processors in the system and ranges from a minimum of  
8 Gbytes (one CPU/ Memory board with eight 512-Mbyte DIMMs) to a maximum of  
32 Gbytes (two boards fully populated with 1-Gbyte DIMMs). For more information  
about system memory, see “About the Memory Modules” on page 28.  
System I/ O is handled by four separate Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)  
buses. These industry-standard buses support all of the systems on-board I/ O  
controllers in addition to six slots for PCI interface cards. Four of the PCI slots  
operate at a 33-MHz clock rate, and two slots operate at either 33 or 66 MHz. All  
slots comply with PCI Local Bus Specification Revision 2.1. For additional details,  
see “About the PCI Cards and Buses” on page 31.  
Internal disk storage is provided by up to two 1-inch, hot-pluggable, Fibre Channel-  
Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) disk drives. Both single-loop and dual-loop configurations  
are supported. The basic system includes an FC-AL disk backplane that  
accommodates 73-Gbyte or 146-Gbyte disks. In addition, an external FC-AL port  
exists on the systems back panel. For additional details, see “Locating Back Panel  
Features” on page 16.  
The backplane provides dual-loop access to each of the FC-AL disk drives. One loop  
is controlled by an on-board FC-AL controller integrated into the system  
centerplane. The second loop is controlled by a PCI FC-AL host adapter card  
(available as a system option). This dual-loop configuration enables simultaneous  
bandwidth. A dual-loop configuration can also be combined with multipathing  
software to provide hardware redundancy and failover capability. Should a  
component failure render one loop inaccessible, the software can automatically  
switch data traffic to the second loop to maintain system availability. For more  
information about the systems internal disk array, see “About FC-AL Technology”  
on page 41, “About the FC-AL Backplane” on page 43, and “About the FC-AL Host  
Adapters” on page 44.  
External multidisk storage subsystems and redundant array of independent disks  
(RAID) storage arrays can be supported by installing single-channel or multichannel  
PCI host adapter cards along with the appropriate system software. Software drivers  
supporting FC-AL and other types of devices are included in the Solaris OS.  
10  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The system provides two on-board Ethernet host PCI adapters, which support  
several modes of operations at 10, 100, and 1000 megabits per second (Mbps).  
interfaces can be combined with multipathing software to provide hardware  
redundancy and failover capability. Should one of the interfaces fail, the software  
can automatically switch all network traffic to an alternate interface to maintain  
network availability. For more information about network connections, see “How to  
Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144 and “How to Configure  
Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146.  
The Sun Fire V490 server provides a serial communication port, which you can  
access through an RJ-45 connector located on the systems back panel. For more  
information, see “About the Serial Port” on page 45.  
The back panel also provides two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for connecting  
USB peripheral devices such as modems, printers, scanners, digital cameras, or a  
Sun Type-6 USB keyboard and mouse. The USB ports support both isochronous  
mode and asynchronous mode. The ports enable data transmission at speeds of  
12 Mbps. For additional details, see “About the USB Ports” on page 46.  
The local system console device can be either a standard ASCII character terminal or  
a local graphics console. The ASCII terminal connects to the systems serial port,  
while a local graphics console requires installation of a PCI graphics card, monitor,  
USB keyboard, and mouse. You can also administer the system from a remote  
workstation connected to the Ethernet or from the system controller.  
Sun Remote System Control (RSC) software is a secure server management tool that  
lets you monitor and control your server over a serial line or over a network. RSC  
provides remote system administration for geographically distributed or physically  
inaccessible systems. RSC software works in conjunction with the system controller  
The SC card runs independently of the host server, and operates off of 5-volt standby  
power from the systems power supplies. These features allow the SC to serve as a  
“lights out” management tool that continues to function even when the server  
operating system goes offline or when the server is powered off. For additional  
details, see “About the System Controller (SC) Card” on page 33.  
The basic system includes two 1448-watt power supplies, each with two internal  
fans. The power supplies are plugged in directly to one power distribution board  
(PDB). One power supply provides sufficient power for a maximally configured  
system. The second power supply provides N+1 redundancy, allowing the system to  
continue operating should the first power supply fail. A power supply in a  
redundant configuration is hot-swappable, so that you can remove and replace a  
faulty power supply without shutting down the operating system or turning off the  
system power. For more information about the power supplies, see “About the  
Power Supplies” on page 38.  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
System reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) are enhanced by features that  
include hot-pluggable disk drives and redundant, hot-swappable power supplies. A  
full list of RAS features is in the section, “About Reliability, Availability, and  
Serviceability Features” on page 19.  
Locating Front Panel Features  
The illustration below shows the system features that you can access from the front  
panel. In the illustration, the media door (upper right) and the power supply access  
panel (bottom) are removed.  
System control switch  
System status LEDs  
Power button  
Disk drive status LEDs  
Fan tray LEDs  
Disk Drive 1  
Disk Drive 0  
DVD-ROM drive  
Fan Tray 0  
Power supply status LEDs  
Security lock  
Power Supply 1  
Power Supply 0  
FIGURE 2-1 Sun Fire V490 Server Front Panel Features  
For information about front panel controls and indicators, see “LED Status  
Indicators” on page 13.  
Security Lock and Top Panel Lock  
In addition to the security lock on the systems front panel, a top panel lock on the  
top of the system controls entry to both the PCI access panel and the CPU access  
panel. When the key is in the upright position, the media door is unlocked.  
However, even if the top panel lock is in the Locked position, thereby locking both  
the PCI and CPU access panels, you can still unlock the media door security lock and  
12  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
gain access to the disk drives, power supplies, and Fan Tray 0. If the media door is  
locked and the power supply access panel is in place, you will not be able to gain  
access to the power supplies, disk drives, and Fan Tray 0—even if the PCI access  
panel is unlocked.  
Note – The same key operates the security lock, the system control switch (see  
“System Control Switch” on page 15), and the top panel lock for the PCI and CPU  
access panels.  
The standard system is configured with two power supplies, which are accessible  
from the front of the system. LED indicators display power status. See “LED Status  
Indicators” on page 13 for additional details.  
LED Status Indicators  
Several LED status indicators on both the front and back panels provide general  
system status, alert you to system problems, and help you to determine the location  
of system faults.  
At the top left of the system as you look at its front are three general system LEDs.  
Two of these LEDs, the system Fault LED and the Power/OK LED, provide a snapshot  
of the overall system status. The Locator LED helps you to locate a specific system  
quickly, even though it may be one of dozens or even scores of systems in a room.  
The front panel Locator LED is at the far left in the cluster. The Locator LED is lit by  
command from the administrator. For instructions, see “How to Operate the Locator  
LED” on page 168.  
Other LEDs located on the front of the system work in conjunction with specific fault  
LED icons. For example, a fault in the disk subsystem illuminates the disk drive  
Fault LED in the center of the LED cluster that is next to the affected disk drive.  
Since all front panel status LEDs are powered by the systems 5-volt standby power  
source, Fault LEDs remain lit for any fault condition that results in a system  
shutdown.  
Locator, Fault, and Power/ OK LEDs are also found at the upper-left corner of the  
back panel. Also located on the back panel are LEDs for the systems two power  
supplies and RJ-45 Ethernet ports.  
See FIGURE 2-1 and FIGURE 2-3 for locations of the front panel and back panel LEDs.  
During system startup, LEDs are toggled on and off to verify that each one is  
working correctly.  
The following tables list and describe the LEDs on the front panel: system LEDs, fan  
tray LEDs, and hard disk drive LEDs.  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
       
Listed from left to right, the system LEDs operate as described in the following table.  
TABLE 2-1  
System LEDs  
Name  
Description  
Locator  
This white LED is lit by the Sun Management Center, RSC  
software, or by the Solaris command to locate a system.  
Fault  
This amber LED lights when the system hardware or  
software has detected a system fault.  
Power/ OK  
This green LED lights when the main power (48 VDC) is  
on.  
The following table describes the fan tray LEDs.  
TABLE 2-2  
Name  
Fan Tray LEDs  
Description  
Fan Tray 0  
(FT 0 Fault)  
This amber LED lights when a fault is detected in the CPU  
fans.  
Fan Tray 1  
(FT 1 Fault)  
This amber LED lights when a fault is detected in the PCI  
fans.  
The following table describes the disk drive LEDs.  
TABLE 2-3  
Name  
Hard Disk Drive LEDs  
Description  
OK-to-Remove  
Fault  
This blue LED lights when it is safe to remove the hard disk  
drive from the system.  
This amber LED lights when the system software detects a  
fault in the monitored hard disk drive. Note that the system  
Fault LED on the front panel will also be lit when this  
occurs.  
Activity  
monitored drive slot. This LED blinks slowly to indicate that  
the drive is spinning up or down, and quickly to indicate  
disk activity.  
Further details about the diagnostic use of LEDs are discussed separately in the  
section, “How to Isolate Faults Using LEDs” on page 172.  
14  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Power Button  
The system Power button is recessed to prevent accidentally turning the system on  
or off. The ability of the Power button to turn the system on or off is controlled by  
the system control switch. See the section, “System Control Switch” on page 15.  
If the operating system is running, pressing and releasing the Power button initiates  
a graceful software system shutdown. Pressing and holding in the Power button for  
five seconds causes an immediate hardware shutdown.  
Caution – Whenever possible, you should use the graceful shutdown method.  
Forcing an immediate hardware shutdown may cause disk drive corruption and loss  
of data.  
System Control Switch  
The four-position system control switch on the systems status and control panel  
controls the power-on modes of the system and prevents unauthorized users from  
powering off the system or reprogramming system firmware. In the following  
illustration, the system control switch is in the Locked position.  
System control switch  
FIGURE 2-2 Four-Position System Control Switch in Locked Position  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
           
The following table describes the function of each system control switch setting.  
TABLE 2-4  
System Control Switch Settings  
Position  
Icon  
Description  
Normal  
This setting enables the system Power button to power the  
system on or off. If the operating system is running, pressing  
and releasing the Power button initiates a graceful software  
system shutdown. Pressing and holding the Power button in  
for five seconds causes an immediate hardware power off.  
Locked  
This setting disables the system Power button to prevent  
unauthorized users from powering the system on or off. It also  
disables the keyboard L1-A (Stop-A) command, terminal  
Break key command, and ~#tipwindow command,  
preventing users from suspending system operation to access  
the system okprompt.  
The Locked setting, used for normal day-to-day operations,  
also prevents unauthorized programming of the system Boot  
PROM.  
Diagnostics  
Forced Off  
This setting forces the power-on self-test (POST) and  
OpenBoot Diagnostics software to run during system startup  
and system resets. The Power button functions the same as  
when the system control switch is in the Normal position.  
This setting forces the system to power off immediately and to  
enter 5-volt standby mode. It also disables the system Power  
button. You may want to use this setting when AC power is  
interrupted and you do not want the system to restart  
automatically when power is restored. With the system control  
switch in any other position, if the system were running prior  
to losing power, it restarts automatically once power is  
restored.  
The Forced Off setting also prevents a system controller  
console from restarting the system. However, the system  
controller card continues to operate using the systems 5-volt  
standby power.  
Locating Back Panel Features  
The following figure shows the system features that you can access from the back  
panel.  
16  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Locator LED  
Power/OK LED  
SC card  
USB ports  
(see Figure 2-4)  
Fault LED  
PCI card slots  
SC ports:  
Serial  
AC input for  
Power Supply 0  
Ethernet  
Power Supply 0  
status LEDs  
Serial port FC-AL port  
Ethernet ports  
see Figure 2-4.)  
AC input for  
Power Supply 1  
status LEDs  
FIGURE 2-3 Sun Fire V490 Server Back Panel Features  
Main system LEDs—Locator, Fault, and Power/ OK—are repeated on the back panel.  
(See TABLE 2-1, TABLE 2-2, and TABLE 2-3 for descriptions of front panel LEDs.) In  
power supplies and both on-board Ethernet connections. Two LEDs located on each  
Ethernet RJ-45 connector display the status of Ethernet activity. Each power supply  
is monitored by four LEDs.  
Details of the diagnostic use of LEDs are discussed separately in the section,  
“How to Isolate Faults Using LEDs” on page 172.  
TABLE 2-5 lists and describes the Ethernet LEDs on the systems back panel.  
TABLE 2-5  
Ethernet LEDs  
Name  
Description  
Activity  
This amber LED lights when data is either being  
transmitted or received by the particular port.  
Link Up  
This green LED lights when a link is established at the  
particular port with its link partner.  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
           
TABLE 2-6 lists and describes the power supply LEDs on the systems back panel.  
TABLE 2-6  
Name  
Power Supply LEDs  
Description  
OK-to-Remove  
Fault  
This blue LED lights when it is safe to remove the power  
supply from the system.  
This amber LED lights when the power supplys internal  
microcontroller detects a fault in the monitored power  
supply. Note that the system Fault LED on the front panel  
will also be lit when this occurs.  
DC Present  
AC Present  
This green LED lights when the power supply is on and  
outputting regulated power within specified limits.  
This green LED lights when a proper AC voltage source is  
input to the power supply.  
Also accessible from the back panel are:  
Inlets for both AC power supplies  
Six PCI card slots  
One system controller (SC) card slot  
Six external data ports: USB, serial, Ethernet, and FC-AL (see FIGURE 2-4)  
USB ports (2)  
Ethernet ports  
Serial port  
FC-AL port  
FIGURE 2-4 Back Panel External Ports  
18  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
About Reliability, Availability, and  
Serviceability Features  
Reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) are aspects of a system’s design that  
affect its ability to operate continuously and to minimize the time necessary to  
service the system. Reliability refers to a systems ability to operate continuously  
without failures and to maintain data integrity. System availability refers to the  
percentage of time that a system remains accessible and usable. Serviceability relates  
to the time it takes to restore a system to service following a system failure. Together,  
reliability, availability, and serviceability features provide for near continuous  
system operation.  
To deliver high levels of reliability, availability and serviceability, the Sun Fire V490  
system offers the following features:  
Hot-pluggable disk drives  
Redundant, hot-swappable power supplies  
Environmental monitoring and fault detection  
Automatic system recovery (ASR) capabilities  
Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO)  
Remote “lights out” management capability  
Hardware watchdog mechanism and externally initiated reset (XIR)  
Dual-loop enabled FC-AL subsystem  
Support for disk and network multipathing with automatic failover capability  
Error correction and parity checking for improved data integrity  
Hot-Pluggable and Hot-Swappable Components  
Sun Fire V490 hardware is designed to support hot-plugging of internal disk drives  
and hot-swapping of power supplies. With the proper software support, you can  
install or remove these components while the system is running. Hot-plug and  
hot-swap technology significantly increases the systems serviceability and  
availability, by providing the ability to:  
system performance  
Replace disk drives and power supplies without service disruption  
For additional information about the systems hot-pluggable and hot-swappable  
components—including a discussion of the differences between the two  
practices—see “About Hot-Pluggable and Hot-Swappable Components” on page 26.  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
     
Power Supply Redundancy  
The system features two hot-swappable power supplies, either of which is capable of  
handling the systems entire load. Thus, the system provides N+1 redundancy,  
allowing the system to continue operating should one of the power supplies or its  
AC power source fail. For more information about power supplies, redundancy, and  
configuration rules, see “About the Power Supplies” on page 38.  
Environmental Monitoring and Control  
The Sun Fire V490 system features an environmental monitoring subsystem  
designed to protect against:  
Extreme temperatures  
Lack of adequate airflow through the system  
Power supply failures  
Monitoring and control capabilities reside at the operating system level as well as in  
the systems Boot PROM firmware. This ensures that monitoring capabilities remain  
operational even if the system has halted or is unable to boot.  
The environmental monitoring subsystem uses an industry-standard Inter-  
Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus. The I2C bus is a simple two-wire serial bus, used  
throughout the system to allow the monitoring and control of temperature sensors,  
fans, power supplies, status LEDs, and the front panel system control switch.  
Temperature sensors are located throughout the system to monitor the ambient  
temperature of the system and the temperature of several application-specific  
integrated circuits (ASICs). The monitoring subsystem polls each sensor and uses  
the sampled temperatures to report and respond to any overtemperature or  
undertemperature conditions.  
The hardware and software together ensure that the temperatures within the  
enclosure do not stray outside predetermined “safe operation” ranges. If the  
temperature observed by a sensor falls below a low-temperature warning threshold  
or rises above a high-temperature warning threshold, the monitoring subsystem  
software lights the system Fault LED on the front status and control panel.  
All error and warning messages are displayed on the system console (if one is  
attached) and are logged in the /var/adm/messagesfile. Front panel Fault LEDs  
remain lit after an automatic system shutdown to aid in problem diagnosis.  
The monitoring subsystem is also designed to detect fan failures. The system  
features two fan trays, which include a total of five individual fans. If any fan fails,  
the monitoring subsystem detects the failure and generates an error message and  
logs it in the /var/adm/messagesfile, lights the appropriate fan tray LED, and  
lights the system Fault LED.  
20  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
The power subsystem is monitored in a similar fashion. Polling the power supply  
status registers periodically, the monitoring subsystem indicates the status of each  
supplys DC outputs.  
If a power supply problem is detected, an error message is displayed on the system  
console and logged in the /var/adm/messagesfile. Additionally, LEDs located on  
each power supply are illuminated to indicate failures.  
Automatic System Recovery  
To some, automatic system recovery (ASR) implies an ability to shield the operating  
system in the event of a hardware failure, allowing the operating system to remain  
up and running. The implementation of ASR on the Sun Fire V490 server is different.  
ASR on the Sun Fire V490 server provides for automatic fault isolation and  
restoration of the operating system following non-fatal faults or failures of these  
hardware components:  
Processors  
Memory modules  
PCI buses and cards  
FC-AL subsystem  
Ethernet interface  
USB interfaces  
Serial interface  
In the event of such a hardware failure, firmware-based diagnostic tests isolate the  
problem and mark the device (using the 1275 Client Interface, via the device tree) as  
either failed or disabled. The OpenBoot firmware then deconfigures the failed device  
and reboots the operating system. This all occurs automatically, as long as the Sun  
Fire V490 system is capable of functioning without the failed component.  
Once restored, the operating system will not attempt to access any deconfigured  
device. This prevents a faulty hardware component from keeping the entire system  
down or causing the system to crash repeatedly.  
As long as the failed component is electrically dormant (that is, it does not cause  
random bus errors or introduce noise into signal lines), the system reboots  
automatically and resumes operation. Be sure to contact a qualified service  
technician about replacing the failed component.  
MPxIO  
Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO), a feature found in the Solaris 8 Operating System, is a  
native multipathing solution for storage devices such as Sun StorEdge™ disk arrays.  
MPxIO provides:  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
             
Host-level multipathing (there is no multipathing support for boot devices)  
Physical host controller interface (pHCI) support  
Sun StorEdge T3 and Sun StorEdge A5x00 support  
Load balancing  
Coexistence with Alternate Pathing (AP) and Dynamic Multipathing (DMP)  
For further details about MPxIO, see “Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO)” on page 66. Also  
consult your Solaris documentation.  
Sun Remote System Control Software  
Sun Remote System Control (RSC) software is a secure server management tool that  
lets you monitor and control your server over a serial line or over a network. RSC  
provides remote system administration for geographically distributed or physically  
inaccessible systems. The RSC software works with the system controller (SC) card  
on the Sun Fire V490 system PCI riser board. The SC card provides an Ethernet  
connection to a remote console and a serial connection to a local alphanumeric  
terminal.  
Once RSC is configured to manage your server, you can use it to run diagnostic tests,  
view diagnostic and error messages, reboot your server, and display environmental  
status information from a remote console.  
RSC provides the following features:  
Remote system monitoring and error reporting (including diagnostic output)  
Remote reboot, power-on, power-off, and reset functions  
Ability to monitor system environmental conditions remotely  
Ability to run diagnostic tests from a remote console  
Ability to capture and store the console log, which you may review or replay  
later, remotely  
Remote event notification for overtemperature conditions, power supply failures,  
Remote access to detailed event logs  
For more details about system controller hardware, see “About the System  
Controller (SC) Card” on page 33.  
For further information, see “How to Monitor the System Using the System  
Controller and RSC Software” on page 190 and the Sun Remote System Controller  
(RSC) Users Guide provided on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
22  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Hardware Watchdog Mechanism and XIR  
To detect and respond to system hang conditions, the Sun Fire V490 system features  
a hardware watchdog mechanism—a hardware timer that is continually reset as long  
as the operating system is running. In the event of a system hang, the operating  
system is no longer able to reset the timer. The timer will then expire and cause an  
automatic externally initiated reset (XIR), eliminating the need for operator  
intervention. When the watchdog mechanism resets the system after sending  
information to the screen and depending upon the OBP variable, a core file might be  
created to give additional information.  
Note – The hardware watchdog mechanism is not activated until you enable it. See  
“How to Enable the Watchdog Mechanism and Its Options” on page 156 for  
instructions.  
The XIR feature is also available for you to invoke manually, by way of your RSC  
console. You use the xircommand manually when the system is absolutely hung  
and an L1-A (Stop-A) keyboard command does not work. When you issue the xir  
command manually by way of RSC, the system is immediately returned to the  
OpenBoot PROM okprompt. From there, you can use OpenBoot commands to  
debug the system.  
Dual-Loop Enabled FC-AL Subsystem  
The systems dual-ported Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) disk drives and  
dual-loop enabled FC-AL backplane may be combined with an optional PCI FC-AL  
host adapter card to provide for fault tolerance and high availability of data. This  
dual-loop configuration allows each disk drive to be accessed through two separate  
component failures in one path by switching all data transfers to an alternate path.  
The FC-AL subsystem is described in greater detail in:  
“About FC-AL Technology” on page 41  
“About the FC-AL Backplane” on page 43  
“About the FC-AL Host Adapters” on page 44  
Chapter 2 System Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
         
Support for RAID Storage Configurations  
By attaching one or more external storage devices to the Sun Fire V490 server, you  
can use a software RAID application, such as Sun StorEdge™, to configure system  
disk storage in a variety of different RAID levels. Configuration options include  
RAID 0 (striping), RAID 1 (mirroring), RAID 0+1 (striping plus mirroring), RAID  
1+0 (mirroring plus striping), and RAID 5 (striping with interleaved parity). You  
choose the appropriate RAID configuration based on the price, performance, and  
reliability and availability goals for your system. You can also configure one or more  
drives to serve as “hot spares” to fill in automatically for a defective drive in the  
event of a disk failure.  
For more information, see “About Volume Management Software” on page 65.  
Error Correction and Parity Checking  
Error correcting code (ECC) is used on all internal system data paths to ensure high  
levels of data integrity. All data that moves between processors, memory, and PCI  
bridge chips have end-to-end ECC protection.  
The system reports and logs correctable ECC errors. A correctable ECC error is any  
single-bit error in a 128-bit field. Such errors are corrected as soon as they are  
detected. The ECC implementation can also detect double-bit errors in the same  
128-bit field and multiple-bit errors in the same nibble (4 bits).  
In addition to providing ECC protection for data, the system offers parity protection  
on all system address buses. Parity protection is also used on the PCI and SCSI  
buses, and in the UltraSPARC IV processors’ internal and external caches.  
24  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
CHAPTER  
3
Hardware Configuration  
server.  
“About FC-AL Technology” on page 41  
“About the FC-AL Backplane” on page 43  
“About the HSSDC FC-AL Port” on page 44  
“About the USB Ports” on page 46  
For configuration information about network interfaces, see:  
“How to Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About Hot-Pluggable and Hot-  
Swappable Components  
In a Sun Fire V490 system, the FC-AL disk drives are hot-pluggable components and  
the power supplies are hot-swappable. (No other component of the system is either  
hot-pluggable or hot-swappable.) Hot-pluggable components are those that you can  
install or remove while the system is running, without affecting the rest of the  
systems capabilities. However, in many cases, you must prepare the operating  
system prior to the hot-plug event by performing certain system administration  
tasks. The power supplies require no such preparation and are called hot-swappable  
components. These components can be removed or inserted at any time without  
preparing the operating system in advance. While all hot-swappable components are  
hot-pluggable, not every hot-pluggable component is hot-swappable.  
Each component is discussed in more detail in the sections that follow. (Not  
discussed here are any devices that you may attach to the USB port, which are  
generally hot-pluggable.)  
Caution – The SC card is not a hot-pluggable component. Do not attempt to access  
any internal components unless you are a qualified service technician. Detailed  
service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and  
Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Power Supplies  
Sun Fire V490 power supplies are hot-swappable—they can be removed or inserted  
at any time without prior software preparation. Keep in mind that a power supply is  
hot-swappable only as long as it is part of a redundant power configuration—a  
system configured with both power supplies in working condition. (Logically, you  
cannot “hot-swap” a power supply if it is the only one in the system that still  
works.)  
Unlike other hot-pluggable devices, you can install or remove a power supply while  
the system is operating at the okprompt when the blue OK-to-Remove LED is lit.  
For additional information, see “About the Power Supplies” on page 38. For  
instructions on removing or installing power supplies, see the Sun Fire V490 Server  
Parts Installation and Removal Guide.  
26  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Disk Drives  
Sun Fire V490 internal disk drives are hot-pluggable. However, certain software  
preparations are required prior to removing or installing a drive. To perform  
Sun Fire V490 disk drive hot-plug operations, you use the Solaris luxadmutility. The  
luxadmutility is a command-line tool for managing intelligent storage arrays such  
as Sun StorEdge A5x00 series disk arrays or Sun Fire V490 internal storage arrays.  
For more information about luxadm, see the luxadmman page. For detailed disk  
hot-plug instructions, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal  
Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Caution – When hot-plugging a disk drive, first ensure that the drives OK-to-  
Remove LED is lit. Then, after disconnecting the drive from the FC-AL backplane,  
allow 30 seconds or so for the drive to spin down completely before removing it.  
About the CPU/ Memory Boards  
The system centerplane provides slots for up to two CPU/ Memory boards. Each  
CPU/ Memory board incorporates two UltraSPARC IV 1050-MHz processors, with  
16 Mbytes of static random access memory (SRAM) external cache memory per  
processor, and slots for up to 16 memory modules. The external cache memory  
cannot be upgraded.  
The memory module slots are labeled A and B. The processors in the system are  
numbered from 0 to 3, depending on the slot where the processors reside.  
Module A  
Processor 0 - CPU 0, 16  
Processor 1 - CPU 2, 18  
Module B  
Processor 0 - CPU 1, 17  
Processor 1 - CPU 3, 19  
Note – CPU/ Memory boards on a Sun Fire V490 system are not hot-pluggable.  
The UltraSPARC IV processor is a highly integrated processor implementing the  
SPARC V9 64-bit architecture. The UltraSPARC IV processor supports both 2D and  
3D graphics, as well as image processing, video compression and decompression,  
and video effects through the sophisticated Visual Instruction Set (VIS) extension.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
       
VIS provides high levels of multimedia performance, including real-time video  
compression and decompression and two streams of MPEG-2 decompression at full  
broadcast quality with no additional hardware support.  
The Sun Fire V490 server employs a shared-memory multiprocessor architecture  
with all processors sharing the same physical address space. The system processors,  
main memory, and I/ O subsystem communicate via a high-speed system  
multiple CPU/ Memory boards, all main memory is accessible from any processor  
over the system bus. The main memory is logically shared by all processors and I/ O  
devices in the system.  
For information about memory modules and memory configuration guidelines, see  
“About the Memory Modules” on page 28.  
About the Memory Modules  
The Sun Fire V490 server uses 3.3-volt, high-capacity dual inline memory modules  
(DIMMs). The DIMMs are built with synchronous dynamic random access memory  
(SDRAM) chips that operate at a 75-MHz clock frequency. The system supports  
DIMMs with 512-Mbyte and 1-Gbyte capacities.  
Each CPU/ Memory board contains slots for 16 DIMMs. Total system memory ranges  
from a minimum of 8 Gbytes (one CPU/ Memory board with eight 512-Mbyte  
DIMMs) to a maximum of 32 Gbytes (two boards fully populated with 1-Gbyte  
DIMMs).  
Within each CPU/ Memory board, the 16 DIMM slots are organized into groups of  
four. The system reads from, or writes to, all four DIMMs in a group simultaneously.  
DIMMs, therefore, must be added in sets of four. FIGURE 3-1 shows the DIMM slots  
and DIMM groups on a Sun Fire V490 CPU/ Memory board. Every fourth slot  
belongs to the same DIMM group. The four groups are designated A0, A1, B0, and  
B1.  
28  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FIGURE 3-1 Memory Module Groups A0, A1, B0, B1  
You must physically remove a CPU/ Memory board from the system before you can  
install or remove DIMMs. The DIMMs must be added four-at-a-time within the same  
DIMM group, and each group used must have four identical DIMMs installed—that  
is, all four DIMMs in the group must be from the same manufacturing vendor and  
must have the same capacity (for example, four 512-Mbyte DIMMs or four 1-Gbyte  
DIMMs).  
Caution – DIMMs are made of electronic components that are extremely sensitive  
to static electricity. Static from your clothes or work environment can destroy the  
modules. Do not remove a DIMM from its antistatic packaging until you are ready to  
install it on the system board. Handle the modules only by their edges. Do not touch  
the components or any metal parts. Always wear an antistatic grounding strap when  
you handle the modules. For more information, see “How to Avoid Electrostatic  
Discharge” on page 120.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
   
Memory Interleaving  
You can maximize the systems memory bandwidth by taking advantage of its  
memory interleaving capabilities. Sun Fire V490 systems support two-way, four-way,  
and eight-way memory interleaving. In most cases, higher interleaving factors result  
in greater system performance. However, actual performance results may vary  
depending on the system application.  
The systems interleaving capabilities are summarized as follows:  
Memory interleaving is limited to memory within the same CPU/ Memory board.  
Memory is not interleaved across CPU/ Memory boards.  
Eight-way interleaving occurs automatically when all 16 DIMM slots in a  
CPU/ Memory board are filled with identical capacity DIMMs (16 identical  
DIMMs).  
Four-way interleaving occurs automatically between any two DIMM groups that  
are configured identically (eight identical capacity DIMMs).  
Two-way interleaving occurs automatically in any DIMM group where the DIMM  
capacities do not match the capacities used in any other group.  
Independent Memory Subsystems  
Each Sun Fire V490 CPU/ Memory board contains two independent memory  
subsystems (one per UltraSPARC IV processor). Memory controller logic  
incorporated into the UltraSPARC IV processor allows each processor to control its  
own memory subsystem. One processor controls DIMM groups A0 and A1, while  
the other processor controls DIMM groups B0 and B1.  
The Sun Fire V490 system uses a shared memory architecture. During normal system  
operations, the total system memory is shared by all processors in the system.  
However, in the event of a processor failure, the two DIMM groups associated with  
the failed processor become unavailable to the other processors in the system.  
TABLE 3-1 shows the association between the processors and their corresponding  
DIMM groups.  
TABLE 3-1  
Association Between Processors and DIMM Groups  
Associated Local DIMM  
CPU Number  
CPU/Memory Slot  
Groups  
CPU 0  
Slot A  
A0, A1  
30  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TABLE 3-1  
Association Between Processors and DIMM Groups (Continued)  
Associated Local DIMM  
CPU Number  
CPU 1  
CPU/Memory Slot  
Slot B  
Groups  
B0, B1  
A0, A1  
B0, B1  
CPU 2  
Slot A  
CPU 3  
Slot B  
Configuration Rules  
DIMMs must be added four-at-a-time within the same group of DIMM slots;  
every fourth slot belongs to the same DIMM group.  
Each group used must have four identical DIMMs installed—that is, all four  
DIMMs must be from the same manufacturing vendor and must have the same  
capacity (for example, four 512-Mbyte DIMMs or four 1-Gbyte DIMMs).  
For guidelines and complete instructions on how to install DIMMs in a  
CPU/ Memory board, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal  
Guide.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
About the PCI Cards and Buses  
All system communication with storage peripherals and network interface devices is  
mediated by two Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bridge chips, located on  
the systems centerplane. Each bridge chip manages communication between the  
systems main interconnect bus and two PCI buses, giving the system a total of four  
separate PCI buses. The four PCI buses support up to six PCI interface cards and  
four centerplane devices.  
TABLE 3-2 describes the PCI bus characteristics and maps each bus to its associated  
bridge chip, integrated devices, and PCI card slots. All slots comply with PCI Local  
Bus Specification Revision 2.1.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
     
Note – PCI cards in a Sun Fire V490 system are not hot-pluggable.  
TABLE 3-2  
PCI Bus Characteristics, Associated Bridge Chips, Centerplane Devices,  
and PCI Slots  
Clock Rate (MHz)/  
Bandwidth (bits)/  
PCI Bridge PCI Bus  
Voltage (V)  
Integrated Devices  
PCI Slots  
0
PCI A  
66 MHz  
64 bits  
3.3V  
None  
Full-length  
slots 0 and 1  
0
PCI B  
33 MHz  
64 bits  
5V  
IDE controller (interface to the  
DVD-ROM drive)  
Full-length  
slot 2, short  
slots 3, 4, 5  
1
1
PCI C  
PCI D  
66 MHz  
64 bits  
3.3V  
FC-AL controller  
None  
Ethernet controller  
33 MHz  
64 bits  
5V  
Ethernet controller  
None  
RIO ASIC (USB and EBus  
interfaces)  
FIGURE 3-2 shows the PCI card slots on the PCI riser board.  
Slot 1 Slot 0  
Slot 2  
Slot 3  
Slot 4  
Slot 5  
FIGURE 3-2 PCI Slots  
32  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuration Rules  
Three slots (0, 1, 2) accept short or long PCI cards, while the other three (3, 4, 5)  
support only short cards; that is, cards less than 7.5 inches (~19 cm) long.  
33-MHz slots accept 5V PCI cards; 66-MHz slots are keyed as 3.3V only cards.  
All slots accept either 32-bit or 64-bit PCI cards.  
All slots comply with PCI Local Bus Specification Revision 2.1.  
Each slot can supply up to 25 watts of power. The total power used for all six slots  
must not exceed 90 watts.  
A 33-MHz add-in card plugged in to either of the 66-MHz slots will cause that  
bus to operate at 33 MHz.  
You can improve overall system availability by installing redundant network or  
storage interfaces on separate PCI buses. For additional information, see “About  
Multipathing Software” on page 64.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
About the System Controller (SC) Card  
The system controller (SC) card enables access, monitoring, and control of the  
Sun Fire V490 server from a remote location. It is a fully independent processor card  
with its own resident firmware, power-on self-test (POST) diagnostics, and real-time  
operating system.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
FIGURE 3-3 Sun System Controller (SC) Card  
The SC card features serial and Ethernet interfaces that provide simultaneous access  
to the Sun Fire V490 server for multiple RSC software users. RSC software users are  
provided secure access to the systems Solaris and OpenBoot console functions and  
have full control over power-on self-test (POST) and OpenBoot Diagnostics.  
The SC card runs independently of the host server, and operates off of 5V standby  
power from the systems power supplies. The card features on-board devices that  
interface with the systems environmental monitoring subsystem and can  
automatically alert administrators to system problems. Together these features  
enable the SC card and RSC software to serve as a “lights out” management tool that  
continues to function even when the server operating system goes offline or when  
the system is powered off.  
The SC card plugs in to a dedicated slot on the system PCI riser board and provides  
the following ports (listed in order from top to bottom, as shown in FIGURE 3-4)  
through an opening in the systems back panel:  
Serial communication port via an RJ-45 connector  
10-Mbps Ethernet port via an RJ-45 twisted-pair Ethernet (TPE) connector  
34  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SC Serial port  
SC Ethernet port  
FIGURE 3-4 SC Card Ports  
Both SC connection ports can be used simultaneously or individually disabled.  
prior to setting up an SC console. For more information, see “How to Monitor the  
System Using the System Controller and RSC Software” on page 190.  
Once you install the operating system and the RSC software, you can then configure  
the system to use the SC as the system console. For detailed instructions, see “How  
to Redirect the System Console to the System Controller” on page 159.  
Configuration Rules  
The SC card is installed in a dedicated slot on the system PCI riser board. Never  
move the SC card to another system slot, since it is not a PCI-compatible card.  
The SC card is not a hot-pluggable component. Before installing or removing an  
SC card, you must power off the system and disconnect all system power cords.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
   
About Hardware Jumpers  
Three jumpers are located on the Sun Fire V490 systems PCI riser board. Note that  
jumpers are set at the factory to ensure best system performance. Be aware that  
moving any jumper shunt from its default location can render the system unstable or  
unusable.  
All jumpers are marked with identification numbers. For example, the jumpers on  
the system PCI riser board are marked J1102, J1103, and J1104. Jumper pins are  
located immediately adjacent to the identification number. The default jumper  
positions are indicated on the board by a white outline. Pin 1 is marked with  
asterisks (*), as shown in FIGURE 3-5.  
J 2XXX  
Jumper number  
Pins  
Asterisks indicate pin 1  
*
*
*
Shaded region indicates  
default jumper position  
FIGURE 3-5 Jumper Identification Guide  
PCI Riser Board Jumpers  
On the PCI riser board are three jumpers, two of which affect transactions with the  
system Boot PROM and one of which is reserved for future use. FIGURE 3-6 illustrates  
the locations of these three jumpers.  
36  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
J1103  
J1104  
J1102  
FIGURE 3-6 Hardware Jumpers on PCI Riser Board  
The functions of the PCI riser board jumpers are shown in TABLE 3-3.  
TABLE 3-3  
Jumper  
PCI Riser Board Jumper Functions  
Shunt on Pins 1 + 2 Selects  
Shunt on Pins 2 + 3 Selects  
Default Setting  
OpenBoot flash PROM  
Optional debug device  
populating connector in  
position J1101  
1 + 2  
J1102  
2
2
1
3
Reserved for future use Reserved for future use  
1 + 2  
1 + 2  
J1103  
J1104  
3
1
OpenBoot flash PROM  
Write-enabled  
OpenBoot flash PROM  
Write-protected  
3
2
1
Each jumper on the PCI riser board has two options, as described in the following  
list.  
J1102 – Labeled “CS” on the PCI riser board, this jumper is used to select the Boot  
PROM device. In the default position with the shunt covering pins 1 and 2, the  
system boots the OpenBoot flash PROM on the centerplane. In the other position,  
the system boots by way of an optional debug device that populates the connector  
at location J1101.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
     
J1103 – Labeled “Hi-Lo” on the PCI riser board, this jumper is reserved for future  
use.  
J1104 – Labeled “WREN” on the PCI riser board, this jumper controls write  
permissions for the system Boot PROM. In the default position with the shunt  
covering pins 1 and 2, the system Boot PROM is write-enabled. Moving the shunt  
to the other position prevents updating the PROM.  
About the Power Supplies  
A central power distribution board (PDB) delivers DC power to all internal system  
components. The systems two standard power supplies—called Power Supply 0  
and Power Supply 1—plug in directly to connectors on this board, and all of the  
supplies installed share equally in satisfying the power demands of the system. AC  
power is brought into the PDB by way of two board-mounted IEC320 receptacles,  
each dedicated to one power supply.  
The Sun Fire V490 system’s N+1 redundant power supplies are modular units,  
designed for fast, easy installation or removal, even while the system is fully  
operational. Power supplies are installed in bays at the front of the system, as shown  
in the following figure.  
Location of Power Supply 0  
Location of Power Supply 1  
FIGURE 3-7 Power Supply Locations  
The power supplies operate over an AC input range of 200–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz,  
without user intervention. The power supplies are capable of providing up to 1448  
watts of DC power. The basic system configuration comes with two power supplies  
installed, either of which is capable of providing sufficient power for a maximally  
configured system.  
38  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The power supplies provide 48-volt and 5-volt standby outputs to the system. The  
48-volt output powers point-of-load DC/ DC converters that provide 1.5V, 1.8V, 2.5V,  
between both supplies via active current-sharing circuitry.  
Power supplies in a redundant configuration feature a hot-swap capability. You can  
remove and replace a faulty power supply without shutting down the operating  
system or turning off the system power. For additional details, see “About Hot-  
Pluggable and Hot-Swappable Components” on page 26.  
Each power supply has separate status LEDs to provide power and fault status  
information. For additional details, see “How to Isolate Faults Using LEDs” on  
page 172.  
Configuration Rule  
Good practice is to connect each power supply to a separate AC circuit, which  
will maintain N+1 redundancy and enable the system to remain operational if one  
of the AC circuits fails. Consult your local electrical codes for any additional  
requirements.  
Caution – If any power supply fails, leave the supply in its bay until you are ready  
to install a replacement.  
For information about installing power supplies, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts  
Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
About the Fan Trays  
The basic system is equipped with five fans mounted on two fan trays, providing  
front-to-rear cooling: Fan Tray 0, which holds three fans that cool the CPUs, and Fan  
Tray 1, which holds two fans that cool the FC-AL drives and PCI cards. Fan Tray 0 is  
accessible from the front of the system, while Fan Tray 1 requires that you remove  
the systems PCI access panel to gain access to it. Power supplies are cooled  
separately, each with its own internal fans.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
     
Caution – Fans on a Sun Fire V490 system are not hot-pluggable. Do not attempt to  
access any internal components unless you are a qualified service technician.  
Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts  
Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
Caution – A complete set of two working fan trays must be present in the system at  
all times. After removing a fan tray, you must install a replacement fan tray. Failure  
to install a replacement tray could lead to serious overheating of your system and  
result in severe damage to the system. For more information, see “Environmental  
Monitoring and Control” on page 20.  
The following figure shows both fan trays. The figure on the left shows Fan Tray 0,  
which cools the CPUs. The figure on the right shows Fan Tray 1, which cools the  
FC-AL drives and PCI cards.  
Fan Tray 0  
Fan Tray 1  
FIGURE 3-8 Fan Trays  
Status for each fan tray is indicated by separate LEDs on the systems front panel,  
which are activated by the environmental monitoring subsystem. The fans operate at  
full speed all the time—speed is not adjustable. Should a fan speed fall below a  
predetermined threshold, the environmental monitoring subsystem prints a warning  
and lights the appropriate Fault LED. For additional details, see “How to Isolate  
Faults Using LEDs” on page 172.  
For each fan in the system, the environmental monitoring subsystem monitors or  
controls the following:  
40  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fan speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) (monitored)  
Fan Fault LEDs (controlled)  
Configuration Rule  
The minimum system configuration requires a complete set of two working fan  
trays—Fan Tray 0 for the CPUs and Fan Tray 1 for the FC-AL drives and PCI  
cards.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
About FC-AL Technology  
Fibre Channel (FC) is a high-performance serial interconnect standard designed for  
bidirectional, point-to-point communication among servers, storage systems,  
workstations, switches, and hubs.  
Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) is an important enhancement to the FC  
standard, developed specifically to meet the needs of storage system interconnects.  
Employing a simple loop topology, FC-AL can support both simple configurations  
and complex arrangements of hubs, switches, servers, and storage systems.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
         
FC-AL devices employ a high-performance serial interface, which supports multiple  
standard protocols such as Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) and  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). By supporting these standard protocols, FC-  
AL preserves any investment in legacy systems, firmware, applications, and  
software.  
The unique features of FC-AL provide many advantages over other data transfer  
technologies. For additional information about FC-AL technology, visit the Fibre  
Channel Association Web site at http://www.fibrechannel.org.  
The following table lists the features and advantages of FC-AL technology.  
TABLE 3-4  
FC-AL Features and Advantages  
FC-AL Features  
Advantages  
Supports 100-Mbyte per second data transfer High throughput meets the demands of  
rate (200 Mbytes per second with dual  
porting).  
current generation high-performance  
processors and disks.  
Capable of addressing up to 127 devices per  
loop (controlled by a single controller) .  
High connectivity controlled by one device  
allows flexible and simpler configurations.  
1
Provides for reliability, availability, and  
serviceability (RAS) features such as hot-  
pluggable and dual-ported disks, redundant  
data paths, and multiple host connections.  
RAS features provide improved fault  
tolerance and data availability.  
Supports standard protocols.  
Migration to FC-AL produces small or no  
impact on software and firmware.  
Implements a simple serial protocol over  
copper or fiber cable.  
Configurations that use serial connections  
are less complex because of the reduced  
number of cables per connection.  
Supports redundant array of independent  
disks (RAID).  
RAID support enhances data availability.  
1
The 127 supported devices include the FC-AL controller required to support each arbitrated loop.  
42  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About the FC-AL Backplane  
All Sun Fire V490 servers include a single FC-AL backplane with connections for  
two internal hard disks, both of which are hot-pluggable.  
The FC-AL backplane accepts two, low-profile (1.0-inch, 2.54-cm), dual-ported  
FC-AL disk drives. Each disk drive is connected to the backplane via a standard 40-  
pin single connector attachment (SCA) interface. Incorporating all power and signal  
connections into a single, blind-mating connector, SCA technology makes it easy to  
add or remove disk drives from the system. Disks using SCA connectors provide  
higher availability and better serviceability than disks using other types of  
connectors.  
The FC-AL backplane provides dual-loop access to both internal disk drives. Dual-  
loop configurations enable each disk drive to be accessed through two separate and  
distinct data paths. This capability provides:  
Increased bandwidth – Allowing faster data transfer rates than those for single-loop  
configurations  
Hardware redundancy – Providing the ability to sustain component failures in one  
path by switching all data transfers to an alternate path  
Note – To take advantage of the dual-loop capability of the FC-AL backplane, an  
optional PCI FC-AL host adapter card must be installed to control the second loop  
(Loop B). For more information, see “About the FC-AL Host Adapters” on page 44.  
Port bypass controllers (PBCs) on the disk backplane ensure loop integrity. When a  
disk or external device is unplugged or fails, the PBCs automatically bypass the  
device, closing the loop to maintain data availability.  
Configuration Rules  
The FC-AL backplane requires low-profile (1.0-inch, 2.54-cm) disk drives.  
The FC-AL disks are hot-pluggable.  
For information about installing or removing an FC-AL disk or disk backplane, see  
the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the  
Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
           
About the HSSDC FC-AL Port  
The Sun Fire V490 system back panel includes an FC-AL port with a high-speed  
serial data connector (HSSDC).  
Note – At this time, no Sun storage products are supported utilizing the HSSDC  
connector.  
About the FC-AL Host Adapters  
The Sun Fire V490 server uses an intelligent Fibre Channel processor as its on-board  
FC-AL controller. Integrated into the system centerplane, the processor resides on  
PCI Bus C and supports a 64-bit, 66-MHz PCI interface. The on-board FC-AL  
controller controls FC-AL operations on Loop A.  
To take advantage of the dual-loop capability of the FC-AL backplane, an optional  
PCI FC-AL host adapter card and optional cable are required to control the second  
loop (Loop B). For this purpose, Sun offers the Sun StorEdge PCI Dual Fibre Channel  
Host Adapter card. See the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide,  
which is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD, for installation  
instructions.  
The Sun Fire V490 server does not support all FC-AL host adapter cards. Contact  
your Sun sales or support engineer for a list of supported cards.  
For best performance, install 66-MHz FC-AL host adapter cards into a 66-MHz  
PCI slot (slot 0 or 1, if available). See “About the PCI Cards and Buses” on  
page 31.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
44  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
About the Internal Disk Drives  
The Sun Fire V490 system includes two internal, low-profile (1.0-inch, 2.54-cm)  
FC-AL disk drives, attached to a backplane. (The system also includes an external  
FC-AL port; see the section, “About the HSSDC FC-AL Port” on page 44.) Internal  
disks are available in storage capacities of 73 or 146 Gbytes, with a rotation speed of  
10,000 RPM. The maximum internal storage capacity is 292 Gbytes (using two 146-  
Gbyte disks), with larger capacities possible as disk storage capacities continue to  
grow.  
Sun Fire V490 disk drives are dual-ported for multipath access. When used in a  
dual-loop configuration—with the optional addition of a second FC-AL controller on  
a PCI adapter card—each drive can be accessed through two separate and distinct  
data paths.  
Sun Fire V490 disk drives are hot-pluggable. You can add, remove, or replace disks  
while the system continues to operate. This capability significantly reduces system  
downtime associated with disk drive replacement. Disk drive hot-plug procedures  
involve software commands for preparing the system prior to removing a disk drive  
and for reconfiguring the operating system after installing a drive. For detailed  
instructions, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which  
is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Three LEDs are associated with each drive, indicating the drives operating status,  
hot-plug readiness, and any fault conditions associated with the drive. These status  
LEDs help you quickly to identify drives requiring service. See TABLE 2-3 for a  
description of these LEDs.  
Configuration Rule  
Disk drives must be Sun standard FC-AL disks with low-profile (1.0-inch,  
2.54-cm) form factors.  
About the Serial Port  
The system provides a serial communication port through an RJ-45 connector  
located on the back panel. The port supports baud rates of 50, 75, 110, 200, 300, 600,  
1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200, 153600, 230400,  
307200, and 460800.  
Chapter 3 Hardware Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
               
The port is accessible by connecting an RJ-45 serial cable to the back panel serial port  
connector. For your convenience, a serial port adapter (part number 530-2889-03) is  
included in your Sun Fire V490 server ship kit. This adapter enables you to use a  
standard RJ-45 serial cable to connect directly from the serial connector on the back  
panel to a Sun workstation, or to any other terminal that is equipped with a DB-25  
serial connector.  
For the serial port location, see “Locating Back Panel Features” on page 16. Also see  
Appendix A.  
About the USB Ports  
The systems back panel provides two external Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for  
connection to USB peripheral devices such as:  
Sun Type-6 USB keyboard  
Sun opto-mechanical three-button USB mouse  
Printers  
Scanners  
Digital cameras  
For USB port locations, see “Locating Back Panel Features” on page 16.  
The USB ports are compliant with the Open Host Controller Interface (Open HCI)  
specification for USB Revision 1.0. Both ports support isochronous and  
asynchronous modes. The ports enable data transmission at speeds of 1.5 Mbps and  
12 Mbps. Note that the USB data transmission speed is significantly faster than that  
of the standard serial ports, which operate at a maximum rate of 460.8 Kbaud.  
The USB ports are accessible by connecting a USB cable to either back panel USB  
connector. The connectors at each end of a USB cable are different, so you cannot  
connect them incorrectly. One connector plugs in to the system or USB hub; the other  
plugs in to the peripheral device. Up to 126 USB devices can be connected to the bus  
simultaneously, through the use of USB hubs. The Universal Serial Bus provides  
power for smaller USB devices such as modems. Larger USB devices, such as  
scanners, require their own power source.  
Both USB ports support hot-plugging. You can connect and disconnect the USB cable  
and peripheral devices while the system is running, without affecting system  
operations. However, you can only perform USB hot-plug operations while the  
operating system is running. USB hot-plug operations are not supported when the  
system okprompt is displayed.  
46  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
CHAPTER  
4
Network Interfaces and System  
Firmware  
This chapter describes the networking options of the system and provides  
“About the okPrompt” on page 49  
“About OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 52  
“About OpenBoot Emergency Procedures” on page 54  
“About Automatic System Recovery” on page 55  
“About Manually Configuring Devices” on page 59  
“Reference for Device Identifiers” on page 61  
About the Network Interfaces  
The Sun Fire V490 server provides two on-board Ethernet interfaces, which reside on  
the system centerplane and conform to the IEEE 802.3z Ethernet standard. For an  
illustration of the Ethernet ports, see FIGURE 2-4. The Ethernet interfaces operate at 10  
Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Two back panel ports with RJ-45 connectors provide access to the on-board Ethernet  
interfaces. Each interface is configured with a unique media access control (MAC)  
address. Each connector features two LEDs, as described in TABLE 4-1.  
TABLE 4-1  
Ethernet Port LEDs  
Name  
Description  
Activity  
This amber LED lights when data is either being transmitted or  
received by the particular port.  
Link Up  
This green LED lights when a link is established at the particular  
port with its link partner.  
Additional Ethernet interfaces or connections to other network types are available  
by installing the appropriate PCI interface cards. An additional network interface  
card can serve as a redundant network interface for one of the systems on-board  
interfaces. If the active network interface becomes unavailable, the system can  
automatically switch to the redundant interface to maintain availability. This  
capability is known as automatic failover and must be configured at the Solaris OS  
The Ethernet driver is installed automatically during the Solaris installation  
procedure.  
For instructions on configuring the system network interfaces, see:  
“How to Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
About Redundant Network Interfaces  
You can configure your system with redundant network interfaces to provide a  
highly available network connection. Such a configuration relies on special Solaris  
software features to detect a failed or failing network interface and automatically  
switch all network traffic over to the redundant interface. This capability is known  
as automatic failover.  
To set up redundant network interfaces, you can enable automatic failover between  
the two similar interfaces using the IP Network Multipathing feature of the Solaris  
OS. For additional details, see “About Multipathing Software” on page 64. You can  
also install a pair of identical PCI network interface cards, or add a single card that  
provides an interface identical to one of the two on-board Ethernet interfaces.  
48  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To help maximize system availability, make sure that any redundant network  
interfaces reside on separate PCI buses, supported by separate PCI bridges. For  
additional details, see “About the PCI Cards and Buses” on page 31.  
About the okPrompt  
A Sun Fire V490 system with Solaris OS software is capable of operating at different  
run levels. A synopsis of run levels follows; for a full description, see the Solaris  
system administration documentation.  
Most of the time, you operate a Sun Fire V490 system at run level 2, or run level 3,  
which are multiuser states with access to full system and network resources.  
Occasionally, you may operate the system at run level 1, which is a single-user  
administrative state. However, the most basic state is run level 0. At this state, it is  
safe to turn off power to the system.  
When a Sun Fire V490 system is at run level 0, the okprompt appears. This prompt  
indicates that the OpenBoot firmware is in control of the system.  
There are a number of scenarios in which this can happen.  
The system comes up under OpenBoot firmware control before the Solaris OS  
software is installed, or whenever the auto-boot?OpenBoot configuration  
variable is set to false.  
The system transitions to run level 0 in an orderly way when the Solaris OS  
software is halted.  
The system reverts to OpenBoot firmware control when the Solaris OS software  
crashes.  
During the boot process, there is a serious hardware problem that prevents the  
Solaris OS software from running, and the system reverts to OpenBoot firmware  
control.  
A serious hardware problem develops while the system is running, and the  
You deliberately place the Sun Fire V490 system under firmware control in order  
to execute firmware-based commands or run diagnostic tests.  
It is the last of these scenarios that most often concerns you as an administrator,  
since there will be times when you need to reach the okprompt. The several ways to  
do this are outlined in “Ways of Reaching the okPrompt” on page 50. For detailed  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
       
What You Should Know About Accessing the ok  
Prompt  
It is important to understand that when you access the okprompt from a  
functioning Sun Fire V490 system, you are suspending the Solaris OS software and  
placing the system under firmware control. Any processes that were running under  
the Solaris OS software are also suspended, and the state of such processes may not be  
recoverable.  
The firmware-based tests and commands you run from the okprompt have the  
potential to affect the state of the system. This means that it is not always possible to  
resume execution of the Solaris OS software from the point at which it was  
suspended. Although the gocommand will resume execution in most circumstances,  
in general, each time you drop the system down to the okprompt, you should  
expect to have to reboot it to get back to the Solaris OS environment.  
As a rule, before suspending the Solaris OS software, you should back up files, warn  
users of the impending shutdown, and halt the system in an orderly manner.  
However, it is not always possible to take such precautions, especially if the system  
is malfunctioning.  
Ways of Reaching the okPrompt  
There are several ways to get to the okprompt, depending on the state of the system  
and the means by which you are accessing the system console. In order of  
desirability, these are:  
Stop-A or Break key sequence  
Externally initiated reset (XIR)  
Manual system reset  
A discussion of each method follows. For instructions, see “How to Get to the ok  
Prompt” on page 126.  
Graceful Halt  
The preferred method of reaching the okprompt is to halt the operating system  
software by issuing an appropriate command (for example, the shutdown, init,  
halt, or uadmincommand) as described in Solaris system administration  
documentation.  
50  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Gracefully halting the system prevents data loss, allows you to warn users  
beforehand, and causes minimal disruption. You can usually perform a graceful halt,  
provided Solaris OS software is running and the hardware has not experienced  
serious failure.  
Stop-A (L1-A) or Break Key Sequence  
When it is impossible or impractical to halt the system gracefully, you can get to the  
okprompt by typing the Stop-A (or L1-A) key sequence from a Sun keyboard, or, if  
you have an alphanumeric terminal attached to the Sun Fire V490 system, by  
pressing the Break key.  
If you use this method to reach the okprompt, be aware that issuing certain  
OpenBoot commands (like probe-scsi, probe-scsi-all, and probe-ide) may  
hang the system.  
Externally Initiated Reset (XIR)  
Generating an externally initiated reset (XIR) has the advantage of allowing you to  
issue the synccommand to preserve file systems and produce a dump file of part of  
the system state for diagnostic purposes. Forcing an XIR may be effective in breaking  
the deadlock that is hanging up the system, but it also precludes the orderly  
shutdown of applications, and so it is not the preferred method of reaching the ok  
prompt.  
Manual System Reset  
Reaching the okprompt by performing a manual system reset should be the method  
of last resort. Doing this results in the loss of all system coherence and state  
information. It also corrupts the machines file systems, although the fsck  
command usually restores them. Use this method only if nothing else works.  
Caution – Forcing a manual system reset results in loss of system state data and  
risks corrupting your file systems.  
For More Information  
For more information about the OpenBoot firmware, see:  
OpenBoot 4.x Command Reference Manual  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
               
An online version of the manual is included with the Solaris Software  
Supplement CD that ships with Solaris software. It is also is available at the  
following web site under Solaris on Sun Hardware:  
http://docs.sun.com  
About OpenBoot Environmental  
Monitoring  
Environmental monitoring and control capabilities for Sun Fire V490 systems reside  
at both the operating system level and the OpenBoot firmware level. This ensures  
that monitoring capabilities are operational even if the system has halted or is  
unable to boot. When the system is under OpenBoot control, the OpenBoot  
temperature sensors periodically. If it detects any voltage, current, fan speed, or  
temperature irregularities, the monitor generates a warning message to the system  
console.  
For additional information about the systems environmental monitoring  
capabilities, see “Environmental Monitoring and Control” on page 20.  
Enabling or Disabling the OpenBoot  
The OpenBoot environmental monitor is enabled by default when the system is  
operating at the okprompt. However, you can enable or disable it yourself using the  
OpenBoot commands env-onand env-off. For more information, see:  
“How to Enable OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 154  
“How to Disable OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 154  
The commands env-onand env-offonly affect environmental monitoring at the  
firmware level. They have no effect on the systems environmental monitoring and  
control capabilities while the operating system is running.  
52  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note – Using the Stop-A keyboard command to enter the OpenBoot environment  
during power-on or reset will immediately disable the OpenBoot environmental  
monitor. If you want the OpenBoot PROM environmental monitor enabled, you  
must reenable it prior to rebooting the system. If you enter the OpenBoot  
environment through any other means—by halting the operating system, by power-  
cycling the system, or as a result of a system panic—the OpenBoot environmental  
monitor will remain enabled.  
Automatic System Shutdown  
If the OpenBoot environmental monitor detects a critical overtemperature condition,  
it will initiate an automatic system power off sequence. In this case, a warning  
similar to the following is generated to the system console:  
WARNING: SYSTEM POWERING DOWN IN 30 SECONDS!  
Press Ctrl-C to cancel shutdown sequence and return to ok prompt.  
If necessary, you can type Ctrl-C to abort the automatic shutdown and return to the  
system okprompt; otherwise, after the 30 seconds expire, the system will power off  
automatically.  
Note – Typing Ctrl-C to abort an impending shutdown also has the effect of  
disabling the OpenBoot environmental monitor. This gives you enough time to  
replace the component responsible for the critical condition without triggering  
another automatic shutdown sequence. After replacing the faulty component, you  
must type the env-oncommand to reinstate OpenBoot environmental monitoring.  
Caution – If you type Ctrl-C to abort an impending shutdown, you should  
immediately replace the component responsible for the critical condition. If a  
replacement part is not immediately available, power off the system to avoid  
damaging system hardware.  
OpenBoot Environmental Status Information  
The OpenBoot command .envenables you to obtain status on the current state of  
everything of interest to the OpenBoot environmental monitor. This includes  
information about the systems power supplies, fans, and temperature sensors.  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
     
environmental monitoring is enabled or disabled. The .envstatus command simply  
reports the current environmental status information; it does not take action if  
anything is abnormal or out of range.  
For an example of .envcommand output, see “How to Obtain OpenBoot  
Environmental Status Information” on page 155.  
About OpenBoot Emergency Procedures  
The introduction of Universal Serial Bus (USB) keyboards has made it necessary to  
change some of the OpenBoot emergency procedures. Specifically, the Stop-D,  
Stop-F, and Stop-N commands that were available on systems with non-USB  
keyboards are not supported on systems that use USB keyboards, such as the Sun  
Fire V490 system. The following sections describe the OpenBoot emergency  
procedures for systems like the Sun Fire V490 server that accept USB keyboards.  
Stop-A Functionality  
Stop-A (Abort) issues a break that drops the system into OpenBoot firmware control  
(indicated by the display of the okprompt). The key sequence works the same on  
the Sun Fire V490 server as it does on older systems with non-USB keyboards, except  
that it does not work during the first few seconds after the machine is reset.  
Stop-D Functionality  
The Stop-D (Diags) key sequence is not supported on systems with USB keyboards.  
However, the Stop-D functionality can be closely emulated by turning the system  
control switch to the Diagnostics position. For more information, see “System  
Control Switch” on page 15.  
The RSC bootmode diagcommand also provides similar functionality. For more  
information, see the Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2 Users Guide, which is  
included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
54  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Stop-F Functionality  
The Stop-F functionality is not available in systems with USB keyboards. However,  
the RSC bootmode forthcommand provides similar functionality. For more  
information, see the Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2 Users Guide, which is  
included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Stop-N Functionality  
The Stop-N sequence is a method of bypassing problems typically encountered on  
older keyboards, you did this by pressing the Stop-N sequence while powering on  
the system.  
On systems with USB keyboards, like the Sun Fire V490, the implementation  
involves waiting for the system to reach a particular state. For instructions, see  
“How to Implement Stop-N Functionality” on page 164.  
The drawback of using Stop-N on a Sun Fire V490 system is that, if diagnostics are  
enabled, it can take some time for the system to reach the desired state. Fortunately,  
an alternative exists: Place the system control switch in the Diagnostics position.  
Placing the system control switch in Diagnostics position will override OpenBoot  
configuration variable settings, allowing the system to recover to the okprompt and  
letting you correct misconfigured settings.  
Assuming you have access to RSC software, another possibility is to use the RSC  
bootmode reset_nvramcommand, which provides similar functionality. For more  
information, see the Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2 Users Guide, which is  
included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
About Automatic System Recovery  
The Sun Fire V490 system provides a feature called automatic system recovery (ASR).  
To some, ASR implies an ability to shield the operating system in the event of a  
hardware failure, allowing the operating system to remain up and running. The  
implementation of ASR on the Sun Fire V490 server is different—it provides for  
automatic fault isolation and restoration of the operating system following non-fatal  
faults or failures of these hardware components:  
Processors  
Memory modules  
PCI buses and cards  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
           
FC-AL subsystem  
Ethernet interface  
USB interface  
Serial interface  
In the event of such a hardware failure, firmware-based diagnostic tests isolate the  
problem and mark the device (using the 1275 Client Interface, via the device tree) as  
either failed or disabled. The OpenBoot firmware then deconfigures the failed device  
and reboots the operating system. This all occurs automatically, as long as the Sun  
Fire V490 system is capable of functioning without the failed component.  
Once restored, the operating system will not attempt to access any deconfigured  
device. This prevents a faulty hardware component from keeping the entire system  
down or causing the system to crash repeatedly.  
As long as the failed component is electrically dormant (that is, it does not cause  
random bus errors or introduce noise into signal lines), the system reboots  
automatically and resumes operation. Be sure to contact a qualified service  
technician about replacing the failed component.  
Auto-Boot Options  
The OpenBoot firmware provides an IDPROM-stored setting called auto-boot?,  
which controls whether the firmware will automatically boot the operating system  
after each reset. The default setting for Sun platforms is true.  
If a system fails power-on diagnostics, then auto-boot?is ignored and the system  
does not start up unless an operator boots the system manually. This behavior  
obviously provides limited system availability. Therefore, the Sun Fire V490  
OpenBoot firmware provides a second OpenBoot configuration variable switch  
called auto-boot-on-error?. This switch controls whether the system will  
attempt to boot when a subsystem failure is detected.  
Both the auto-boot?and auto-boot-on-error?switches must be set to true  
(their default values) to enable an automatic boot following the firmware detection  
of a nonfatal subsystem failure.  
ok setenv auto-boot? true  
ok setenv auto-boot-on-error? true  
The system will not attempt to boot if it is in service mode, or following any fatal  
nonrecoverable error. For examples of fatal nonrecoverable errors, see “Error  
Handling Summary” on page 57.  
56  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Error Handling Summary  
Error handling during the power-on sequence falls into one of three cases  
summarized in the following table.  
Scenario  
System Behavior  
Notes  
No errors are  
detected.  
The system attempts to boot if  
auto-boot?is true.  
By default, auto-boot?and auto-boot-on-  
error?are both true.  
Nonfatal errors are  
detected.  
The system attempts to boot if  
auto-boot?and auto-boot-on-  
error?are both true.  
Nonfatal errors include:  
1
• FC-AL subsystem failure  
• Ethernet interface failure  
• USB interface failure  
• Serial interface failure  
• PCI card failure  
2
• Processor failure  
3
• Memory failure  
Fatal nonrecoverable  
errors are detected.  
The system will not boot regardless  
of OpenBoot configuration variable  
settings.  
Fatal nonrecoverable errors include:  
• All processors failed  
• All logical memory banks failed  
• Flash RAM cyclical redundancy check  
• Critical FRU-ID SEEPROM configuration  
data failure  
• Critical application specific integrated  
circuit (ASIC) failure  
1. A working alternate path to the boot disk is required. For more information, see “About Multipathing Software” on page 64.  
2. A single processor failure causes the entire CPU/ Memory module to be deconfigured. Reboot requires that another functional  
CPU/ Memory module be present.  
3. Since each physical DIMM belongs to two logical memory banks, the firmware deconfigures both memory banks associated with the  
affected DIMM. This leaves the CPU/ Memory module operational, but with one of the processors having a reduced complement of  
memory.  
Note – If POST or OpenBoot Diagnostics detects a nonfatal error associated with the  
normal boot device, the OpenBoot firmware automatically deconfigures the failed  
device and tries the next-in-line boot device, as specified by the boot-device  
configuration variable.  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
   
Reset Scenarios  
The system control switch position and three OpenBoot configuration variables,  
service-mode?, diag-switch?, and diag-trigger, control whether and how  
the system runs firmware diagnostics in response to system reset events.  
When you set the system control switch to the Diagnostics position, the system is in  
service mode and runs tests at Sun-specified levels, disabling auto-booting and  
ignoring the settings of OpenBoot configuration variables.  
Setting the service-mode?variable to truealso puts the system in service mode,  
producing exactly the same results as setting the system control switch to the  
Diagnostics position.  
When you set the system control switch to the Normal position, and when the  
OpenBoot service-mode?variable is set to false(its default value), the system is  
in normal mode. When the system is in this mode, you can control diagnostics and  
auto-boot behavior by setting OpenBoot configuration variables, principally  
diag-switch?and diag-trigger.  
When diag-switch?is set to false(its default value), you can use  
diag-triggerto determine what kind of reset events trigger diagnostic tests. The  
following table describes the various settings (keywords) of the diag-trigger  
variable. You can use the first three of these keywords in any combination.  
Keyword  
Function  
power-on-reset  
Reset caused by power-cycling the system.  
(default)  
error-reset  
(default)  
Reset caused by certain hardware error events, such as a RED State  
Exception, Watchdog Reset, or Fatal Reset.  
user-reset  
Reset caused by operating system panics or by user-initiated  
commands from OpenBoot (reset-all, boot) or from Solaris OS  
(reboot, shutdown, init).  
all-resets  
none  
Any kind of system reset.  
Diagnostic tests are not executed.  
See TABLE 6-2 for a fuller list of OpenBoot configuration variables affecting  
diagnostics and system behavior.  
58  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Normal Mode and Service Mode Information  
You will find a full description of normal and service modes, as well as detailed  
information about the OpenBoot configuration variables that affect ASR behavior, in  
OpenBoot PROM Enhancements for Diagnostic Operation, which is available on the  
Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
About Manually Configuring Devices  
This section explains the difference between deconfiguring a device and a slot, tells  
what happens if you try to deconfigure all of a systems processors, and also  
discusses how to obtain device paths.  
Deconfiguring Devices vs. Slots  
For some devices, different things happen when you deconfigure a slot than when  
you deconfigure the device that resides within a slot.  
If you deconfigure a PCI device, the device in question can still be probed by  
firmware and recognized by the operating system. Solaris OS “sees” such a device,  
reports it as failed, and refrains from using it.  
If you deconfigure a PCI slot, firmware will not even probe the slot, and the  
operating system will not “know about” any devices that may be plugged in to the  
slot.  
In both cases, the devices in question are rendered unusable. So why make the  
distinction? Occasionally, a device may fail in such a way that probing it disrupts the  
system. In cases such as these, deconfiguring the slot in which the device resides is  
more likely to contain the problem.  
Deconfiguring All System Processors  
You can use the asr-disablecommand to deconfigure all system processors.  
Doing this will not crash the system. The OpenBoot system firmware, even though it  
reports all processors as deconfigured, in actuality keeps one processor functioning  
well enough to run the firmware.  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
         
Device Paths  
When manually deconfiguring and reconfiguring devices, you might need to  
determine the full physical paths to those devices. You can do this by typing:  
ok show-devs  
The show-devscommand lists the system devices and displays the full path name  
of each device. An example of a path name for a Fast Ethernet PCI card is shown  
below:  
/pci@8,700000/pci@2/SUNW,hme@0,1  
You can display a list of current device aliases by typing:  
ok devalias  
You can also create your own device alias for a physical device by typing:  
ok devalias alias_name physical_device_path  
where alias_name is the alias that you want to assign, and physical_device_path is the  
full physical device path for the device.  
Note – If you manually deconfigure a device alias using asr-disable, and then  
assign a different alias to the device, the device will remain deconfigured even  
though the device alias has changed.  
ok .asr  
The related deconfiguration and reconfiguration procedures are covered in:  
“How to Deconfigure a Device Manually” on page 162  
“How to Reconfigure a Device Manually” on page 163  
Device identifiers are listed in “Reference for Device Identifiers” on page 61.  
60  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Refer to the following table when manually specifying which devices to deconfigure  
and reconfigure. The related procedures are covered in:  
“How to Deconfigure a Device Manually” on page 162  
“How to Reconfigure a Device Manually” on page 163  
Device Identifiers  
Devices  
cmpx, where x is a number 0–3, or 16–19  
Particular processors  
cmpx-bank0, cmpx-bank1, cmpx-bank2, cmpx-bank3, where x Memory banks 0–3 for each processor  
is a number 0–3, or 16–19  
gptwo-slotA, gptwo-slotB, gptwo-slotC, gptwo-slotD  
CPU/ Memory board slots A–D  
io-bridge8, io-bridge9  
PCI bridge chips 0 and 1, respectively  
ob-net0, ob-net1  
On-board Ethernet controllers  
On-board FC-AL controller  
PCI slots 0–5  
ob-fcal  
pci-slot0, pci-slot1, ... pci-slot5  
Note – The device identifiers above are not case-sensitive; you can type them as  
uppercase or lowercase characters.  
You can use wild cards within device identifiers to reconfigure a range of devices, as  
shown in the following table.  
Device Identifiers  
Devices  
*
All devices  
cmp*  
All processors  
cmpx-bank*, where x is a number 0–3, or 16–19  
All memory banks for each processor  
All CPU/ Memory board slots  
All PCI bridge chips  
gptwo-slot*  
io-bridge*  
pci*  
All on-board PCI devices (on-board Ethernet, FC-AL)  
and all PCI slots  
pci-slot*  
All PCI slots  
Note – You cannot deconfigure a range of devices. Wild cards are valid only for  
specifying a range of devices to reconfigure.  
Chapter 4 Network Interfaces and System Firmware  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
62  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
5
System Administration Software  
The following information is covered in this chapter:  
“About System Administration Software” on page 63  
“About Multipathing Software” on page 64  
“About Volume Management Software” on page 65  
“About Sun Cluster Software” on page 69  
“About Communicating With the System” on page 69  
About System Administration Software  
A number of software-based administration tools are available to help you configure  
your system for performance and availability, monitor and manage your system, and  
identify hardware problems. These administration tools include:  
Multipathing software  
Volume management software  
Sun Cluster software  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following table provides a summary of each tool with a pointer to additional  
information.  
TABLE 5-1  
System Administration Tool Summary  
For More  
Tool  
Description  
Information  
Multipathing  
software  
Multipathing software is used to define and control  
alternate (redundant) physical paths to I/ O devices.  
If the active path to a device becomes unavailable,  
the software can automatically switch to an alternate  
path to maintain availability.  
See “About  
Software” on  
page 64.  
Volume  
management  
software  
Volume management applications, such as Solstice  
DiskSuite, provide easy-to-use online disk storage  
management for enterprise computing environments. Management  
See “About  
Volume  
Using advanced RAID technology, these products  
ensure high data availability, excellent I/ O  
performance, and simplified administration.  
Software” on  
page 65.  
Sun Cluster  
software  
Sun Cluster software enables you to interconnect  
multiple Sun servers so that they work together as a  
single, highly available and scalable system. Sun  
Cluster software delivers high availability—through  
automatic fault detection and recovery—and  
See “About Sun  
Cluster  
Software” on  
page 69.  
scalability, ensuring that mission-critical applications  
and services are always available when needed.  
About Multipathing Software  
Multipathing software lets you define and control redundant physical paths to I/ O  
devices, such as storage devices and network interfaces. If the active path to a device  
becomes unavailable, the software can automatically switch to an alternate path to  
maintain availability. This capability is known as automatic failover. To take  
advantage of multipathing capabilities, you must configure the server with  
redundant hardware, such as redundant network interfaces or two FC-AL host bus  
adapters connected to the same dual-ported storage array.  
For Sun Fire V490 systems, three different types of multipathing software are  
available:  
Solaris IP Network Multipathing software provides multipathing and load  
balancing capabilities for IP network interfaces.  
Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager software for the Solaris OS, which is part of the Sun  
SAN Foundation Suite, automates multipath I/ O failover, failback, and SAN-  
wide load balancing.  
64  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO) is a new architecture fully integrated within the Solaris  
OS (beginning with Solaris 8) that enables I/ O devices to be accessed through  
multiple host controller interfaces from a single instance of the I/ O device.  
For More Information  
For information about setting up redundant hardware interfaces for storage devices  
or networks, see “About Redundant Network Interfaces” on page 48.  
For instructions on how to configure and administer Solaris IP Network  
Multipathing, consult the IP Network Multipathing Administration Guide provided  
with your specific Solaris release.  
For more information about Sun StorEdge Traffic Manager, see the Sun Fire V490  
Server Product Notes.  
For information about MPxIO, see “Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO)” on page 66 and refer  
to your Solaris OS documentation.  
About Volume Management Software  
Sun Microsystems offers two different volume management applications for use on  
Sun Fire V490 systems:  
Sun StorEdge™ Traffic Manager  
Solstice DiskSuite™ software  
Volume management software lets you create disk volumes. Volumes are logical disk  
devices comprising one or more physical disks or partitions from several different  
disks. Once you create a volume, the operating system uses and maintains the  
volume as if it were a single disk. By providing this logical volume management  
layer, the software overcomes the restrictions imposed by physical disk devices.  
Suns volume management products also provide RAID data redundancy and  
performance features. RAID, which stands for redundant array of independent disks, is  
a technology that helps protect against disk and hardware failures. Through RAID  
technology, volume management software is able to provide high data availability,  
excellent I/ O performance, and simplified administration.  
Suns volume management applications offer the following features:  
Support for several types of RAID configurations, which provide varying degrees  
of availability, capacity, and performance  
Hot-spare facilities, which provide for automatic data recovery when disks fail  
Chapter 5 System Administration Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
     
Performance analysis tools, which enable you to monitor I/ O performance and  
isolate bottlenecks  
A graphical user interface (GUI), which simplifies storage management  
Support for online resizing, which enables volumes and their file systems to grow  
and shrink online  
Online reconfiguration facilities, which let you change to a different RAID  
configuration or modify characteristics of an existing configuration  
Multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO)  
A newer alternative to dynamic multipathing (DMP) that is also supported by the  
Sun Fire V490 server is multiplexed I/ O (MPxIO). Beginning with Solaris 8, MPxIO  
is fully integrated within the Solaris OS softwares core I/ O framework. MPxIO  
enables you more effectively to represent and manage devices that are accessible  
through multiple I/ O controller interfaces within a single instance of the Solaris OS.  
The MPxIO architecture:  
Helps protect against I/ O outages due to I/ O controller failures. Should one I/ O  
controller fail, MPxIO automatically switches to an alternate controller.  
Increases I/ O performance by load balancing across multiple I/ O channels.  
Both Sun StorEdge T3 and Sun StorEdge A5x00 storage arrays are supported by  
MPxIO on a Sun Fire V490 server. Supported I/ O controllers are usoc/fpFC-AL  
disk controllers and qlc/fpFC-AL disk controllers.  
RAID Concepts  
Solstice DiskSuite software supports RAID technology to optimize performance,  
availability, and user cost. RAID technology improves performance, reduces  
recovery time in the event of file system errors, and increases data availability even  
in the event of a disk failure. There are several levels of RAID configurations that  
provide varying degrees of data availability with corresponding trade-offs in  
performance and cost.  
This section describes some of the most popular and useful of those configurations,  
including:  
Disk concatenation  
Disk mirroring (RAID 1)  
Disk striping (RAID 0)  
Disk striping with parity (RAID 5)  
Hot spares  
66  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Disk Concatenation  
Disk concatenation is a method for increasing logical volume size beyond the  
capacity of one disk drive by creating one large volume from two or more smaller  
drives. This lets you create arbitrarily large partitions.  
Using this method, the concatenated disks are filled with data sequentially, with the  
second disk being written to when no space remains on the first, the third when no  
room remains on the second, and so on.  
RAID 1: Disk Mirroring  
Disk mirroring (RAID 1) is a technique that uses data redundancy—two complete  
copies of all data stored on two separate disks—to protect against loss of data due to  
disk failure. One logical volume is duplicated on two separate disks.  
When the operating system needs to write to a mirrored volume, both disks are  
updated. The disks are maintained at all times with exactly the same information.  
When the operating system needs to read from the mirrored volume, it reads from  
whichever disk is more readily accessible at the moment, which can result in  
enhanced performance for read operations.  
RAID 1 offers the highest level of data protection, but storage costs are high, and  
write performance is reduced since all data must be stored twice.  
RAID 0: Disk Striping  
Disk striping (RAID 0) is a technique for increasing system throughput by using  
several disk drives in parallel. Whereas in non-striped disks the operating system  
writes a single block to a single disk, in a striped arrangement, each block is divided  
and portions of the data are written to different disks simultaneously.  
Chapter 5 System Administration Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
       
System performance using RAID 0 will be better than using RAID 1 or 5, but the  
possibility of data loss is greater because there is no way to retrieve or reconstruct  
data stored on a failed disk drive.  
RAID 5: Disk Striping With Parity  
RAID 5 is an implementation of disk striping in which parity information is  
included with each disk write. The advantage of this technique is that if any one  
disk in a RAID 5 array fails, all the information on the failed drive can be  
reconstructed from the data and parity on the remaining disks.  
System performance using RAID 5 will fall between that of RAID 0 and RAID 1;  
however, RAID 5 provides limited data redundancy. If more than one disk fails, all  
data is lost.  
Hot Spares (Hot Relocation)  
In a hot spares arrangement, one or more disk drives are installed in the system but  
are unused during normal operation. Should one of the active drives fail, the data on  
the failed disk is automatically reconstructed and generated on a hot spare disk,  
enabling the entire data set to maintain its availability.  
For More Information  
See the documentation supplied with Solstice DiskSuite software. For more  
information about MPxIO, see your Solaris system administration documentation.  
68  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
About Sun Cluster Software  
Sun™ Cluster software lets you connect up to eight Sun servers in a cluster  
configuration. A cluster is a group of nodes that are interconnected to work as a  
single, highly available and scalable system. A node is a single instance of Solaris  
software—it may be running on a standalone server or on a domain within a  
standalone server. With Sun Cluster software, you can add or remove nodes while  
online, and mix and match servers to meet your specific needs.  
Sun Cluster software delivers high availability through automatic fault detection  
and recovery, and scalability, ensuring that mission-critical applications and services  
are always available when needed.  
With Sun Cluster software installed, other nodes in the cluster will automatically  
take over and assume the workload when a node goes down. It delivers  
predictability and fast recovery capabilities through features such as local  
application restart, individual application failover, and local network adapter  
failover. Sun Cluster software significantly reduces downtime and increases  
productivity by helping to ensure continuous service to all users.  
The software lets you run both standard and parallel applications on the same  
cluster. It supports the dynamic addition or removal of nodes, and enables Sun  
servers and storage products to be clustered together in a variety of configurations.  
Existing resources are used more efficiently, resulting in additional cost savings.  
Sun Cluster software allows nodes to be separated by up to 10 kilometers. This way,  
in the event of a disaster in one location, all mission-critical data and services remain  
available from the other unaffected locations.  
For More Information  
See the documentation supplied with the Sun Cluster software.  
About Communicating With the System  
To install your system software or to diagnose problems, you need some way to  
interact at a low level with the server. The system console is Suns facility for doing  
this. You use the system console to view messages and issue commands. The system  
console is unique—there can be only one per system.  
Chapter 5 System Administration Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
       
During initial installation of the Sun Fire V490 system and the Solaris OS software,  
you must use the built-in serial port (ttya) to access the system console. After  
installation, you can configure the system console to use different input and output  
devices. See TABLE 5-2 for a summary.  
TABLE 5-2  
Ways of Communicating With the System  
During  
After  
Installation Installation  
An alphanumeric terminal attached to serial port A (ttya)  
(See “How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System  
Console” on page 133.)  
A tipline attached to serial port A (ttya)  
(See “How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on  
page 129.)  
A local graphics terminal (frame buffer card, screen etc.)  
(See “How to Configure a Local Graphics Terminal as the System  
Console” on page 135.)  
The system controller (SC)  
(See “Sun Remote System Control Software” on page 22 and “How  
to Monitor the System Using the System Controller and RSC  
Software” on page 190.)  
While the computer is starting up, the system console displays status and error  
messages generated by firmware-based tests. After those tests have been run, you  
can enter special commands that affect the firmware and alter the systems behavior.  
For more information about tests that run during the boot process, see “About  
Diagnostics and the Boot Process” on page 77.  
Once the Solaris OS software is booted, the system console displays UNIX system  
messages and accepts UNIX commands.  
Using the System Console  
To use the system console, you need some means of getting data into and out of the  
server, which means attaching some kind of hardware to the server. Initially, you  
may have to configure that hardware, and load and configure appropriate software  
as well.  
70  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Instructions for attaching and configuring hardware to access the system console are  
given in Chapter 7. The following subsections, “Default System Console  
Configuration” on page 71 and “Alternative System Console Configuration” on  
page 71, provide background information and references to instructions appropriate  
for the particular device you choose to access the system console.  
Default System Console Configuration  
On Sun Fire V490 servers, the system console comes preconfigured to allow input  
and output only by means of an alphanumeric terminal or tipline attached to the  
site.  
tiplets you use windowing and operating system features.  
For instructions on setting up an alphanumeric terminal as the system console, see  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133.  
For instructions on accessing the system console via a tipline, see “How to Access  
the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129.  
Alternative System Console Configuration  
After initial system installation, you can configure the system console to communicate  
via alternative devices, including a local graphics terminal, or the system controller.  
To use a device other than the built-in serial port as the system console, you need to  
reset certain of the systems OpenBoot configuration variables and properly install  
and configure the device in question.  
Using a Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console  
The Sun Fire V490 server is shipped without a mouse, keyboard, monitor, or frame  
you must install a graphics frame buffer card into a PCI slot, and attach a monitor,  
mouse, and keyboard to the appropriate back panel ports.  
After starting the system you may need to install the correct software driver for the  
card you have installed. For detailed hardware instructions, see “How to Configure  
a Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console” on page 135.  
Chapter 5 System Administration Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
     
Note – Power-on self-test (POST) diagnostics cannot display status and error  
messages to a local graphics terminal. If you configure a local graphics terminal as  
the system console, POST messages will be redirected to the serial port (ttya), but  
other system console messages will appear on the graphics terminal.  
Using the System Controller as the System Console  
Once the system controller (SC) is set up and its software configured, you can use  
need to access the system console from remote locations. The system controller also  
provides system console access from workstations running various operating  
environments.  
For instructions on setting up the system controller as the system console, see “How  
to Redirect the System Console to the System Controller” on page 159.  
For instructions on configuring and using RSC software, see the Sun Remote System  
Controller (RSC) Users Guide.  
72  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
6
Diagnostic Tools  
The Sun Fire V490 server and its accompanying software contain many tools and  
features that help you:  
Isolate problems when there is a failure of a field-replaceable component  
Monitor the status of a functioning system  
Exercise the system to disclose an intermittent or incipient problem  
“About Isolating Faults in the System” on page 100  
“About Monitoring the System” on page 101  
“About Exercising the System” on page 105  
“Reference for OpenBoot Diagnostics Test Descriptions” on page 109  
“Reference for Decoding I2C Diagnostic Test Messages” on page 111  
“Reference for Terms in Diagnostic Output” on page 114  
If you only want instructions for using diagnostic tools, skip this chapter and turn to  
Part Three of this manual. There, you can find chapters that tell you how to isolate  
failed parts (Chapter 10), monitor the system (Chapter 11), and exercise the system  
(Chapter 12).  
About the Diagnostic Tools  
Sun provides a wide spectrum of diagnostic tools for use with the Sun Fire V490  
server. These tools range from the formal—like Suns comprehensive Validation Test  
Suite (SunVTS), to the informal—like log files that may contain clues helpful in  
narrowing down the possible sources of a problem.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The diagnostic tool spectrum also ranges from standalone software packages, to  
firmware-based power-on self-tests (POST), to hardware LEDs that tell you when the  
power supplies are operating.  
Some diagnostic tools enable you to examine many computers from a single console,  
others do not. Some diagnostic tools stress the system by running tests in parallel,  
while other tools run sequential tests, enabling the machine to continue its normal  
functions. Some diagnostic tools function even when power is absent or the machine  
is out of commission, while others require the operating system to be up and  
running.  
The full palette of tools discussed in this manual is summarized in TABLE 6-1.  
TABLE 6-1  
Summary of Diagnostic Tools  
Remote  
Diagnostic Tool  
Type  
What It Does  
Accessibility and Availability  
Capability  
LEDs  
Hardware  
Firmware  
Firmware  
Firmware  
Software  
Software  
Indicate status of overall system  
and particular components  
Accessed from system  
chassis. Available anytime  
power is available  
Local, but  
can be  
viewed via  
SC  
POST  
Tests core components of system  
Runs automatically on  
startup. Available when the can be  
operating system is not  
running  
Local, but  
viewed via  
SC  
OpenBoot  
Diagnostics  
Tests system components,  
focusing on peripherals and  
I/ O devices  
Runs automatically or  
interactively. Available  
when the operating system  
is not running  
Local, but  
can be  
viewed via  
SC  
OpenBoot  
commands  
Display various kinds of system  
information  
Available whether or not  
the operating system is  
running  
Local, but  
can be  
accessed via  
SC  
Solaris  
commands  
Display various kinds of system  
information  
Requires operating system  
Local, but  
can be  
accessed via  
SC  
SunVTS  
Exercises and stresses the system, Requires operating system. View and  
running tests in parallel  
Optional package may  
need to be installed  
control over  
network  
74  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TABLE 6-1  
Summary of Diagnostic Tools (Continued)  
Remote  
Diagnostic Tool  
Type  
What It Does  
Accessibility and Availability  
Capability  
SC card  
and RSC  
software  
Hardware  
and  
software  
Monitors environmental  
conditions, performs basic fault  
isolation, and provides remote  
console access  
Can function on standby  
power and without  
operating system  
Designed for  
remote  
access  
Sun  
Management  
Center  
Software  
Monitors both hardware  
environmental conditions and  
software performance of multiple monitored and master  
Requires operating system  
to be running on both  
Designed for  
remote  
access  
machines. Generates alerts for  
various conditions  
servers. Requires a  
dedicated database on the  
master server  
Hardware  
Diagnostic  
Suite  
Software  
Exercises an operational system  
by running sequential tests. Also  
reports failed FRUs  
Separately purchased  
optional add-on to Sun  
Management Center.  
Requires operating system  
and Sun Management  
Center  
Designed for  
remote  
access  
Why are there so many different diagnostic tools?  
There are a number of reasons for the lack of a single all-in-one diagnostic test,  
starting with the complexity of the server systems.  
Consider the data bus built into every Sun Fire V490 server. This bus features a five-  
way switch called a CDX that interconnects all processors and high-speed I/ O  
interfaces (see FIGURE 6-1). This data switch enables multiple simultaneous transfers  
over its private data paths. This sophisticated high-speed interconnect represents  
just one facet of the Sun Fire V490 servers advanced architecture.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
   
CPU / Memory Boards  
Processor  
Memory  
Processor  
Memory  
Processor  
Memory  
Processor  
Memory  
Boot Bus  
Boot Bus  
Data  
Switch  
Data  
Switch  
Centerplane Board  
5-Way Data Switch  
Fan  
I/O  
I/O  
Bridge  
I/O  
Bridge  
Bridge  
(reserved)  
Power  
Supply  
EBus  
EBus  
TTYA  
Boot  
PROM  
Boot Bus  
Controller  
Other I/O  
Power  
Supply  
Disk  
Controller  
Ethernet  
Controller  
PCI  
Riser  
Board  
DVD Controller  
PCI Slots  
Fan  
Ethernet  
Controller  
USB  
Controller  
EBus  
SC  
IDPROM  
2
HSSDC, USB, & Ethernet I/O  
I C Bus  
FIGURE 6-1 Simplified Schematic View of a Sun Fire V490 System  
Consider also that some diagnostics must function even when the system fails to  
start. Any diagnostic capable of isolating problems when the system fails to start up  
must be independent of the operating system. But any diagnostic that is  
independent of the operating system will also be unable to make use of the  
operating systems considerable resources for getting at the more complex causes of  
failures.  
76  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Another complicating factor is that different installations have different diagnostic  
requirements. You may be administering a single computer or a whole data center  
full of equipment racks. Alternatively, your systems may be deployed remotely—  
perhaps in areas that are physically inaccessible.  
Finally, consider the different tasks you expect to perform with your diagnostic  
tools:  
Isolating faults to a specific replaceable hardware component  
Exercising the system to disclose more subtle problems that may or may not be  
hardware related  
Monitoring the system to catch problems before they become serious enough to  
cause unplanned downtime  
Not every diagnostic tool can be optimized for all these varied tasks.  
Instead of one unified diagnostic tool, Sun provides a palette of tools each of which  
has its own specific strengths and applications. To appreciate how each tool fits into  
the larger picture, it is necessary to have some understanding of what happens when  
the server starts up, during the so-called boot process.  
About Diagnostics and the Boot Process  
You have probably had the experience of powering on a Sun system and watching as  
it goes through its boot process. Perhaps you have watched as your console displays  
messages that look like the following:  
0:0>  
0:0>@(#) Sun Fire[TM] V480/V490 POST 4.15 2004/04/09 16:27  
0:0>Copyright © 2004 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved  
SUN PROPRIETARY/CONFIDENTIAL.  
Use is subject to license terms.  
0:0>Jump from OBP->POST.  
0:0>Diag level set to MIN.  
0:0>Verbosity level set to NORMAL.  
0:0>  
0:0>Start selftest...  
0:0>CPUs present in system: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0  
0:0>Test CPU(s)....Done  
It turns out these messages are not quite so inscrutable once you understand the  
boot process. These kinds of messages are discussed later.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
       
It is important to understand that almost all of the firmware-based diagnostics can  
be disabled so as to minimize the amount of time it takes the server to start up. In  
the following discussion, assume that the system is configured to run its firmware-  
based tests.  
Prologue: System Controller Boot  
As soon as you plug in the Sun Fire V490 server to an electrical outlet, and before  
you turn on power to the server, the system controller (SC) inside the server begins its  
standby power, the system controller card begins functioning before the server itself  
comes up.  
The system controller provides access to a number of control and monitoring  
functions through Remote System Control (RSC) software. For more information  
about RSC software, see “Sun Remote System Control Software” on page 22.  
Stage One: OpenBoot Firmware and POST  
Every Sun Fire V490 server includes a chip holding about 2 Mbytes of firmware-  
based code. This chip is called the Boot PROM. After you turn on system power, the  
first thing the system does is execute code that resides in the Boot PROM.  
This code, which is referred to as the OpenBoot firmware, is a small-scale operating  
system unto itself. However, unlike a traditional operating system that can run  
multiple applications for multiple simultaneous users, OpenBoot firmware runs in  
single-user mode and is designed solely to test, configure, and boot the system,  
thereby ensuring that the hardware is sufficiently “healthy” to run its normal  
operating system software.  
When system power is turned on, the OpenBoot firmware begins running directly  
out of the Boot PROM, since at this stage system memory has not been verified to  
work properly.  
Soon after power is turned on, the system hardware determines that at least one  
processor is powered on, and is submitting a bus access request, which indicates that  
the processor in question is at least partly functional. This becomes the master  
processor, and is responsible for executing OpenBoot firmware instructions.  
The OpenBoot firmwares first actions are to check whether to run the power-on self-  
test (POST) diagnostics and other tests. The POST diagnostics constitute a separate  
chunk of code stored in a different area of the Boot PROM (see FIGURE 6-2).  
78  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
POST  
Boot  
PROM  
IDPROM  
8 Kbytes  
2 Mbytes  
variables  
OpenBoot  
firmware  
FIGURE 6-2 Boot PROM and IDPROM  
The extent of these power-on self-tests, and whether they are performed at all, is  
controlled by configuration variables stored in a separate firmware memory device  
called the IDPROM. These OpenBoot configuration variables are discussed in  
“Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
As soon as POST diagnostics can verify that some subset of system memory is  
functional, tests are loaded into system memory.  
The Purpose of POST Diagnostics  
The POST diagnostics verify the core functionality of the system. A successful  
execution of the POST diagnostics does not ensure that there is nothing wrong with  
the server, but it does ensure that the server can proceed to the next stage of the boot  
process.  
For a Sun Fire V490 server, this means:  
At least one of the processors is working.  
At least a subset of system memory is functional.  
Cache memory is functional.  
Data switches located both on the CPU/ Memory boards and the centerplane are  
functioning.  
Input/ output bridges located on the centerplane are functioning.  
The PCI bus is intact—that is, there are no electrical shorts.  
It is possible for a system to pass all POST diagnostics and still be unable to boot the  
operating system. However, you can run POST diagnostics even when a system fails  
to boot, and these tests are likely to disclose the source of most hardware problems.  
POST generally reports errors that are persistent in nature. To catch intermittent  
problems, consider running a system exercising tool. See “About Exercising the  
System” on page 105.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
             
What POST Diagnostics Do  
Each POST diagnostic is a low-level test designed to pinpoint faults in a specific  
hardware component. For example, individual memory tests called address bitwalk  
and data bitwalk ensure that binary 0s and 1s can be written on each address and data  
line. During such a test, the POST may display output similar to this:  
1:0>Data Bitwalk on Slave 3  
1:0> Test Bank 0.  
In this example, processor 1 is the master processor, as indicated by the prompt  
1:0>, and it is about to test the memory associated with processor 3, as indicated by  
the message “Slave 3.”  
Note – The x:y numbering system identifies processors that have multiple cores.  
The failure of such a test reveals precise information about particular integrated  
circuits, the memory registers inside them, or the data paths connecting them:  
1:0>ERROR: TEST = Data Bitwalk on Slave 3  
1:0>H/W under test = CPU3 Memory  
1:0>MSG = ERROR:miscompare on mem test!  
Address: 00000030.001b0038  
Expected: 00000000.00100000  
Observed: 00000000.00000000  
What POST Error Messages Tell You  
When a specific power-on self-test discloses an error, it reports different kinds of  
information about the error:  
The specific test that failed  
The specific circuit or subcomponent that is most likely at fault  
The field-replaceable units (FRUs) most likely to require replacement, in order of  
likelihood  
80  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Here is an excerpt of POST output showing another error message.  
0:0>Schizo unit 1 PCI DMA C test  
0:0> FAILED  
0:0>ERROR: TEST = Schizo unit 1 PCI DMA C test  
0:0>H/W under test = Motherboard/Centerplane Schizo 1, I/O Board, CPU  
0:0>MSG =  
0:0> Schizo Error - 16bit Data miss compare  
0:0> address 0000060300012800  
0:0> expected 0001020304050607  
0:0> observed 0000000000000000  
0:0>END_ERROR  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-1  
POST Error Message  
An important feature of POST error messages is the H/W under testline. (See the  
arrow in CODE EXAMPLE 6-1.)  
The H/W under testline indicates which FRU or FRUs may be responsible for the  
error. Note that in CODE EXAMPLE 6-1, three different FRUs are indicated. Using  
TABLE 6-13 to decode some of the terms, you can see that this POST error was most  
likely caused by a bad system interconnect circuit (Schizo) on the centerplane.  
However, the error message also indicates that the PCI riser board (I/O board)  
may be at fault. In the least likely case, the error might stem from the master  
processor, in this case processor 0.  
Why a POST Error May Implicate Multiple FRUs  
Because each test operates at such a low level, the POST diagnostics are often more  
definite in reporting the minute details of the error, like the numerical values of  
expected and observed results, than they are about reporting which FRU is  
responsible. If this seems counter-intuitive, consider the block diagram of one data  
path within a Sun Fire V490 server, shown in FIGURE 6-3.  
5-way  
I/O  
bridge  
PCI  
controller  
Data  
switch  
data  
Processor  
switch  
CPU / Memory board  
Centerplane  
PCI riser board  
FIGURE 6-3 POST Diagnostic Running Across FRUs  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The dashed lines in FIGURE 6-3 represent boundaries between FRUs. Suppose a POST  
diagnostic is running in the processor in the left part of the diagram. This diagnostic  
attempts to initiate a built-in self-test in a PCI device located in the right side of the  
diagram.  
If this built-in self-test fails, there could be a fault in the PCI controller, or, less likely,  
in one of the data paths or components leading to that PCI controller. The POST  
diagnostic can tell you only that the test failed, but not why. So, though the POST  
may present very precise data about the nature of the test failure, any of three  
different FRUs could be implicated.  
Controlling POST Diagnostics  
You control POST diagnostics (and other aspects of the boot process) by setting  
OpenBoot configuration variables in the IDPROM. Changes to OpenBoot  
configuration variables generally take effect only after the machine is restarted.  
These variables affect OpenBoot Diagnostics tests as well as POST diagnostics.  
TABLE 6-2 lists the most important and useful of these variables. You can find more  
Operation and OpenBoot 4.x Command Reference Manual. The former is included on the  
Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD. The latter is included with the Solaris Software  
Supplement CD that ships with Solaris software.  
You can find instructions for changing OpenBoot configuration variables in “How to  
View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables” on page 180.  
TABLE 6-2  
OpenBoot Configuration  
OpenBoot Configuration Variables  
Variable  
Description and Keywords  
auto-boot  
Determines whether the operating system automatically starts up. Default is true.  
true—Operating system automatically starts once firmware tests finish.  
false—System remains at okprompt until you type boot.  
auto-boot-on-  
error?  
Determines whether the system attempts to boot after a nonfatal error. Default is  
true.  
trueSystem automatically boots after a nonfatal error if the variable  
auto-boot?is also set to true.  
falseSystem remains at the okprompt.  
diag-level  
Determines the level or type of diagnostics executed. Default is max.  
offNo testing.  
min—Only basic tests are run.  
max—More extensive tests may be run, depending on the device.  
82  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
TABLE 6-2  
OpenBoot Configuration Variables (Continued)  
OpenBoot Configuration  
Variable  
Description and Keywords  
diag-out-console Redirects diagnostic and console messages to the system controller. Default is false.  
true—Display diagnostic messages via the SC console.  
false—Display diagnostic messages via the serial port ttyaor a graphics terminal.  
diag-script  
Determines which devices are tested by OpenBoot Diagnostics. Default is normal.  
noneNo devices are tested.  
normal—On-board (centerplane-based) devices that have self-tests are tested.  
all—All devices that have self-tests are tested.  
diag-switch?  
Controls diagnostic execution in normal mode. Default is false.  
trueDiagnostics are only executed on power-on reset events, but the level of test  
coverage, verbosity, and output is determined by user-defined settings.  
falseDiagnostics are executed upon next system reset, but only for those class of  
reset events specified by the OpenBoot configuration variable  
diag-trigger. The level of test coverage, verbosity, and output is determined by  
user-defined settings.  
Note: The above behaviors only apply to server machines like the Sun Fire V490  
server. Workstations behave differently. For details, see OpenBoot PROM Enhancements  
for Diagnostic Operation.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TABLE 6-2  
OpenBoot Configuration  
OpenBoot Configuration Variables (Continued)  
Variable  
Description and Keywords  
diag-trigger  
Specifies the class of reset event that causes diagnostic tests to run. This variable can  
accept single keywords as well as combinations of the first three keywords separated  
by spaces. For details, see “How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables”  
on page 180. Default is power-on-resetand error-reset.  
error-resetReset that is caused by certain hardware error events such as RED  
State Exception Reset, Watchdog Reset, Software-Instruction Reset, or Hardware  
Fatal Reset.  
power-on-resetReset that is caused by power cycling the system.  
user-resetReset that is initiated by an operating system panic or by user-  
initiated commands from OpenBoot (reset-allor boot) or from Solaris (reboot,  
shutdown, or init).  
all-resets—Any kind of system reset.  
noneNo power-on self-tests or OpenBoot Diagnostics tests run.  
input-device  
output-device  
Selects where console input is taken from. Default is keyboard.  
ttya—From built-in serial port.  
keyboard—From attached keyboard that is part of a graphics terminal.  
rsc-console—From the system controller.  
Note: Should the specified input device be unavailable, the system automatically  
reverts to ttya.  
Selects where diagnostic and other console output is displayed. Default is screen.  
ttyaTo built-in serial port.  
screenTo attached screen that is part of a graphics terminal.  
rsc-consoleTo the system controller.  
Note: POST messages cannot be displayed on a graphics terminal. They are sent to  
ttyaeven when output-deviceis set to screen. Should the specified output  
device be unavailable, the system automatically reverts to ttya.  
service-mode?  
Controls whether the system is in service mode. Default is false.  
trueService mode. Diagnostics are executed at Sun-specified levels, overriding  
but preserving user settings.  
falseNormal mode, unless overridden by the system control switch. Diagnostics  
execution depends entirely on the settings of diag-switch?and other user-  
defined OpenBoot configuration variables.  
Note: If the system control switch is in Diagnostics position, the system will boot in  
service mode even if the service-mode?variable is false.  
84  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Stage Two: OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests  
Once POST diagnostics have finished running, POST reports back to the OpenBoot  
firmware the status of each test it has run. Control then reverts back to the OpenBoot  
firmware code.  
OpenBoot firmware code compiles a hierarchical “census” of all devices in the  
system. This census is called a device tree. Though different for every system  
configuration, the device tree generally includes both built-in system components  
and optional PCI bus devices.  
Following the successful execution of POST diagnostics, the OpenBoot firmware  
proceeds to run OpenBoot Diagnostics tests. Like the POST diagnostics, OpenBoot  
Diagnostics code is firmware-based and resides in the Boot PROM.  
What Are OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests For?  
OpenBoot Diagnostics tests focus on system I/ O and peripheral devices. Any device  
in the device tree, regardless of manufacturer, that includes an IEEE 1275-compatible  
self-test is included in the suite of OpenBoot Diagnostics tests. On a Sun Fire V490  
server, OpenBoot Diagnostics test the following system components:  
I/ O interfaces; including USB and serial ports  
System controller  
Keyboard, mouse, and video (when present)  
On-board boot devices (Ethernet, disk controller)  
Any PCI option card with an IEEE 1275-compatible built-in self-test  
By default, the OpenBoot Diagnostics tests run automatically via a script when you  
start up the system. However, you can also run OpenBoot Diagnostics tests  
manually, as explained in the next section.  
Controlling OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests  
When you restart the system, you can run OpenBoot Diagnostics tests either  
interactively from a test menu, or by entering commands directly from the ok  
prompt.  
Most of the same OpenBoot configuration variables you use to control POST (see  
TABLE 6-2) also affect OpenBoot Diagnostics tests. Notably, you can determine  
OpenBoot Diagnostics testing level—or suppress testing entirely—by appropriately  
setting the diag-levelvariable.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
               
In addition, the OpenBoot Diagnostics tests use a special variable called test-args  
that enables you to customize how the tests operate. By default, test-argsis set to  
contain an empty string. However, you can set test-argsto one or more of the  
reserved keywords, each of which has a different effect on OpenBoot Diagnostics  
tests. TABLE 6-3 lists the available keywords.  
TABLE 6-3  
Keywords for the test-argsOpenBoot Configuration Variable  
Keyword  
bist  
What It Does  
Invokes built-in self-test (BIST) on external and peripheral devices  
Displays all debug messages  
debug  
iopath  
loopback  
media  
Verifies bus/ interconnect integrity  
Exercises external loopback path for the device  
Verifies external and peripheral device media accessibility  
restore  
Attempts to restore original state of the device if the previous  
execution of the test failed  
silent  
Displays only errors rather than the status of each test  
Displays main test and each subtest that is called  
Displays detailed messages of status of all tests  
subtests  
verbose  
callers=N  
Displays backtrace of N callers when an error occurs  
callers=0—Displays backtrace of all callers before the error  
errors=N  
Continues executing the test until N errors are encountered  
errors=0—Displays all error reports without terminating testing  
If you want to make multiple customizations to the OpenBoot Diagnostics testing,  
you can set test-argsto a comma-separated list of keywords, as in this example:  
ok setenv test-args debug,loopback,media  
From the OpenBoot Diagnostics Test Menu  
the menu by typing obdiagat the okprompt. See “How to Isolate Faults Using  
Interactive OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests” on page 177 for full instructions.  
The obdiag>prompt and the OpenBoot Diagnostics interactive menu (FIGURE 6-4)  
appear. For a brief explanation of each OpenBoot Diagnostics test, see TABLE 6-10 in  
“Reference for OpenBoot Diagnostics Test Descriptions” on page 109.  
86  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
o b d i a g  
1 SUNW,qlc@2  
4 flashprom@0,0  
7 ide@6  
2 bbc@1,0  
3 ebus@1  
5 i2c@1,2e  
6 i2c@1,30  
9 network@2  
12 rtc@1,300070  
8 network@1  
10 pmc@1,300700  
13 serial@1,400000  
11 rsc-control@1,3062f8  
14 usb@1,3  
Commands: test test-all except help what setenv set-default exit  
diag-passes=1 diag-level=off test-args=subtests  
FIGURE 6-4 OpenBoot Diagnostics Interactive Test Menu  
Interactive OpenBoot Diagnostics Commands  
You run individual OpenBoot Diagnostics tests from the obdiag>prompt by typing:  
where n represents the number associated with a particular menu item.  
There are several other commands available to you from the obdiag>prompt. For  
descriptions of these commands, see TABLE 6-11 in “Reference for OpenBoot  
Diagnostics Test Descriptions” on page 109.  
You can obtain a summary of this same information by typing helpat the obdiag>  
prompt.  
From the okPrompt: The testand test-allCommands  
You can also run OpenBoot Diagnostics tests directly from the okprompt. To do this,  
type the testcommand, followed by the full hardware path of the device (or set of  
devices) to be tested. For example:  
ok test /pci@x,y/SUNW,qlc@2  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
           
Note – Knowing how to construct an appropriate hardware device path requires  
precise knowledge of the hardware architecture of the Sun Fire V490 system.  
To customize an individual test, you can use test-argsas follows:  
ok test /usb@1,3:test-args={verbose,debug}  
This affects only the current test without changing the value of the test-args  
OpenBoot configuration variable.  
You can test all the devices in the device tree with the test-allcommand:  
ok test-all  
If you specify a path argument to test-all, then only the specified device and its  
children are tested. The following example shows the command to test the USB bus  
and all connected devices with self-tests:  
ok test-all /pci@9,700000/usb@1,3  
What OpenBoot Diagnostics Error Messages Tell You  
OpenBoot Diagnostics error results are reported in a tabular format that contains a  
short summary of the problem, the hardware device affected, the subtest that failed,  
and other diagnostic information. CODE EXAMPLE 6-2 displays a sample OpenBoot  
Diagnostics error message.  
88  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Testing /pci@9,700000/ebus@1/rsc-control@1,3062f8  
ERROR : SC card is not present in system, or SC card is broken.  
DEVICE : /pci@9,700000/ebus@1/rsc-control@1,3062f8  
SUBTEST : selftest  
CALLERS : main  
MACHINE : Sun Fire V490  
SERIAL# : 705459  
DATE  
: 11/28/2001 14:46:21 GMT  
CONTR0LS: diag-level=min test-args=media,verbose,subtests  
Error: /pci@9,700000/ebus@1/rsc-control@1,3062f8 selftest failed, return code = 1  
Selftest at /pci@9,700000/ebus@1/rsc-control@1,3062f8 (errors=1) ...... failed  
Pass:1 (of 1) Errors:1 (of 1) Tests Failed:1 Elapsed Time: 0:0:0:0  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-2  
OpenBoot Diagnostics Error Message  
2
I C Bus Device Tests  
The i2c@1,2eand i2c@1,30OpenBoot Diagnostics tests examine and report on  
environmental monitoring and control devices connected to the Sun Fire V490  
2
servers Inter-IC (I C) bus.  
Error and status messages from the i2c@1,2eand i2c@1,30OpenBoot Diagnostics  
2
tests include the hardware addresses of I C bus devices:  
2
The I C device address is given at the very end of the hardware path. In this  
example, the address is 2,a8, which indicates a device located at hexadecimal  
2
address A8 on segment 2 of the I C bus.  
To decode this device address, see “Reference for Decoding I2C Diagnostic Test  
Messages” on page 111. Using TABLE 6-12, you can see that fru@2,a8corresponds to  
2
an I C device on DIMM 4 on processor 2. If the i2c@1,2etest were to report an error  
against fru@2,a8, you would need to replace this memory module.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
   
Other OpenBoot Commands  
Beyond the formal firmware-based diagnostic tools, there are a few commands you  
can invoke from the okprompt. These OpenBoot commands display information  
that can help you assess the condition of a Sun Fire V490 server. These include the  
following commands:  
.envcommand  
printenvcommand  
probe-scsiand probe-scsi-allcommands  
probe-idecommand  
show-devscommand  
This section describes the information these commands give you. For instructions on  
using these commands, turn to “How to Use OpenBoot Information Commands” on  
page 198, or look up the appropriate man page.  
.envCommand  
The .envcommand displays the current environmental status, including fan speeds;  
and voltages, currents, and temperatures measured at various system locations. For  
more information, see “About OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 52,  
and “How to Obtain OpenBoot Environmental Status Information” on page 155.  
printenvCommand  
The printenvcommand displays the OpenBoot configuration variables. The  
display includes the current values for these variables as well as the default values.  
For details, see “How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables” on  
page 180.  
For more information about printenv, see the printenvman page. For a list of  
some important OpenBoot configuration variables, see TABLE 6-2.  
probe-scsiand probe-scsi-allCommands  
The probe-scsiand probe-scsi-allcommands check the presence of SCSI or  
FC-AL devices and verify that the bus itself is operating properly.  
Caution – If you used the haltcommand or the Stop-A key sequence to reach the  
okprompt, then issuing the probe-scsior probe-scsi-allcommand can hang  
the system.  
90  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
The probe-scsicommand communicates with all SCSI and FC-AL devices  
connected to on-board SCSI and FC-AL controllers. The probe-scsi-all  
command additionally accesses devices connected to any host adapters installed in  
PCI slots.  
For any SCSI or FC-AL device that is connected and active, the probe-scsiand  
probe-scsi-allcommands display its loop ID, host adapter, logical unit number,  
unique World Wide Name (WWN), and a device description that includes type and  
manufacturer.  
The following is sample output from the probe-scsicommand.  
ok probe-scsi  
LiD HA LUN --- Port WWN --- ----- Disk description -----  
0 0 0 2100002037cdaaca SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
1 1 0 2100002037a9b64e SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-3 probe-scsiCommand Output  
The following is sample output from the probe-scsi-allcommand.  
ok probe-scsi-all  
/pci@9,600000/SUNW,qlc@2  
LiD HA LUN --- Port WWN --- ----- Disk description -----  
0 0 0 2100002037cdaaca SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
1 1 0 2100002037a9b64e SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
/pci@8,600000/scsi@1,1  
Target 4  
Unit 0 Disk  
SEAGATE ST32550W SUN2.1G0418  
/pci@8,600000/scsi@1  
/pci@8,600000/pci@2/SUNW,qlc@5  
/pci@8,600000/pci@2/SUNW,qlc@4  
LiD HA LUN --- Port WWN --- ----- Disk description -----  
0 0 0 2200002037cdaaca SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
1 1 0 2200002037a9b64e SEAGATE ST336704FSUN36G 0726  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-4 probe-scsi-allCommand Output  
Note that the probe-scsi-allcommand lists dual-ported devices twice. This is  
because these FC-AL devices (see the qlc@2entry in CODE EXAMPLE 6-4) can be  
accessed through two separate controllers: the on-board Loop-A controller and the  
optional Loop-B controller provided through a PCI card.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
       
probe-ideCommand  
The probe-idecommand communicates with all Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE)  
devices connected to the IDE bus. This is the internal system bus for media devices  
such as the DVD drive.  
Caution – If you used the haltcommand or the Stop-A key sequence to reach the  
okprompt, then issuing the probe-idecommand can hang the system.  
The following is sample output from the probe-idecommand.  
ok probe-ide  
Device 0 ( Primary Master )  
Removable ATAPI Model: TOSHIBA DVD-ROM SD-C2512  
Device 1 ( Primary Slave )  
Not Present  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-5 probe-ideCommand Output  
show-devsCommand  
The show-devscommand lists the hardware device paths for each device in the  
firmware device tree. CODE EXAMPLE 6-6 shows some sample output (edited for  
brevity).  
/pci@9,600000  
/pci@9,700000  
/pci@8,600000  
/pci@8,700000  
/memory-controller@3,400000  
/SUNW,UltraSPARC-IV@3,0  
/memory-controller@1,400000  
/SUNW,UltraSPARC-IV@1,0  
/virtual-memory  
/memory@m0,20  
/pci@9,600000/SUNW,qlc@2  
/pci@9,600000/network@1  
/pci@9,600000/SUNW,qlc@2/fp@0,0  
/pci@9,600000/SUNW,qlc@2/fp@0,0/disk  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-6 show-devsCommand Output  
92  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Stage Three: The Operating System  
If a system passes OpenBoot Diagnostics tests, it normally attempts to boot its  
multiuser operating system. For most Sun systems, this means the Solaris OS. Once  
the server is running in multiuser mode, you have recourse to software-based  
diagnostic tools, like SunVTS and Sun Management Center. These tools can help you  
with more advanced monitoring, exercising, and fault isolating capabilities.  
Note – If you set the auto-bootOpenBoot configuration variable to false, the  
operating system does not boot automatically following completion of the firmware-  
based tests.  
In addition to the formal tools that run on top of Solaris OS software, there are other  
resources that you can use when assessing or monitoring the condition of a Sun Fire  
V490 server. These include:  
Error and system message log files  
Solaris system information commands  
Error and System Message Log Files  
Error and other system messages are saved in the file /var/adm/messages.  
Messages are logged to this file from many sources, including the operating system,  
the environmental control subsystem, and various software applications.  
For information about /var/adm/messagesand other sources of system  
information, refer to your Solaris system administration documentation.  
Solaris System Information Commands  
Some Solaris commands display data that you can use when assessing the condition  
of a Sun Fire V490 server. These include the following commands:  
prtconfcommand  
prtdiagcommand  
prtfrucommand  
psrinfocommand  
showrevcommand  
This section describes the information these commands give you. For instructions on  
using these commands, turn to “How to Use Solaris System Information  
Commands” on page 197, or look up the appropriate man page.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
         
prtconfCommand  
The prtconfcommand displays the Solaris device tree. This tree includes all the  
devices probed by OpenBoot firmware, as well as additional devices, like individual  
disks, that only the operating system software “knows” about. The output of  
prtconfalso includes the total amount of system memory. CODE EXAMPLE 6-7 shows  
an excerpt of prtconfoutput (edited to save space).  
System Configuration: Sun Microsystems sun4u  
Memory size: 1024 Megabytes  
System Peripherals (Software Nodes):  
SUNW,Sun-Fire-V490  
packages (driver not attached)  
SUNW,builtin-drivers (driver not attached)  
...  
SUNW,UltraSPARC-IV (driver not attached)  
memory-controller, instance #3  
pci, instance #0  
SUNW,qlc, instance #5  
fp (driver not attached)  
disk (driver not attached)  
...  
pci, instance #2  
ebus, instance #0  
flashprom (driver not attached)  
bbc (driver not attached)  
power (driver not attached)  
i2c, instance #1  
fru, instance #17  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-7 prtconfCommand Output  
The prtconfcommands -poption produces output similar to the OpenBoot  
show-devscommand (see “show-devsCommand” on page 92). This output lists  
only those devices compiled by the system firmware.  
prtdiagCommand  
The prtdiagcommand displays a table of diagnostic information that summarizes  
the status of system components.  
94  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The display format used by the prtdiagcommand can vary depending on what  
version of the Solaris OS is running on your system. Following is an excerpt of some  
of the output produced by prtdiagon a healthy Sun Fire V490 system running  
Solaris 8, Update 7.  
System Configuration: Sun Microsystems sun4u Sun Fire V490  
System clock frequency: 150 MHz  
Memory size: 4096 Megabytes  
========================= CPUs ===============================================  
Run E$  
CPU  
CPU  
Brd CPU MHz MB Impl.  
Mask  
--- --- --- ---- ------- ----  
A
A
0 900 8.0 US-IV 2.1  
2 900 8.0 US-IV 2.1  
========================= Memory Configuration ===============================  
Logical Logical Logical  
MC Bank  
Brd ID num  
--- --- ----  
Bank  
size  
Bank  
Status  
DIMM  
Size  
Interleave Interleaved  
Factor with  
------ ----------- ------ ---------- -----------  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
512MB no_status  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
256MB  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
8-way  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
========================= IO Cards =========================  
Bus Max  
IO Port Bus  
Freq Bus Dev,  
Type ID Side Slot MHz Freq Func State Name  
Model  
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----- ------------------------- ----------  
------  
PCI  
PCI  
#
8
B
3
33  
33  
33  
33  
3,0 ok  
5,1 ok  
TECH-SOURCE,gfxp  
GFXP  
8
B
5
SUNW,hme-pci108e,1001  
SUNW,qsi  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-8 prtdiagCommand Output  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In addition to that information, prtdiagwith the verbose option (-v) also reports  
on front panel status, disk status, fan status, power supplies, hardware revisions,  
and system temperatures.  
System Temperatures (Celsius):  
-------------------------------  
Device  
Temperature  
Status  
---------------------------------------  
CPU0  
CPU2  
DBP0  
59  
64  
22  
OK  
OK  
OK  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-9 prtdiagVerbose Output  
In the event of an overtemperature condition, prtdiagreports an error in the Status  
column.  
System Temperatures (Celsius):  
-------------------------------  
Device  
Temperature  
Status  
---------------------------------------  
CPU0  
CPU1  
62  
102  
OK  
ERROR  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-10 prtdiagOvertemperature Indication Output  
Similarly, if there is a failure of a particular component, prtdiagreports a fault in  
the appropriate Status column.  
Fan Status:  
-----------  
Bank  
----  
CPU0  
CPU1  
RPM  
Status  
----- ------  
4166 [NO_FAULT]  
0000 [FAULT]  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-11 prtdiagFault Indication Output  
prtfruCommand  
The Sun Fire V490 system maintains a hierarchical list of all field-replaceable units  
(FRUs) in the system, as well as specific information about various FRUs.  
96  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The prtfrucommand can display this hierarchical list, as well as data contained in  
the serial electrically-erasable programmable read-only memory (SEEPROM) devices  
located on many FRUs. CODE EXAMPLE 6-12 shows an excerpt of a hierarchical list of  
FRUs generated by the prtfrucommand with the -loption.  
/frutree  
/frutree/chassis (fru)  
/frutree/chassis/io-board (container)  
/frutree/chassis/rsc-board (container)  
/frutree/chassis/fcal-backplane-slot  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-12 prtfru-lCommand Output  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-13 shows an excerpt of SEEPROM data generated by the prtfru  
command with the -coption.  
/frutree/chassis/rsc-board (container)  
SEGMENT: SD  
/ManR  
/ManR/UNIX_Timestamp32: Fri Apr 27 00:12:36 EDT 2001  
/ManR/Fru_Description: SC PLAN B  
/ManR/Manufacture_Loc: BENCHMARK,HUNTSVILLE,ALABAMA,USA  
/ManR/Sun_Part_No: 5015856  
/ManR/Sun_Serial_No: 001927  
/ManR/Vendor_Name: AVEX Electronics  
/ManR/Initial_HW_Dash_Level: 02  
/ManR/Initial_HW_Rev_Level: 50  
/ManR/Fru_Shortname: SC  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-13 prtfru-cCommand Output  
Data displayed by the prtfrucommand varies depending on the type of FRU. In  
general, this information includes:  
FRU description  
Manufacturer name and location  
Part number and serial number  
Hardware revision levels  
Information about the following Sun Fire V490 FRUs is displayed by the prtfru  
command:  
Centerplane  
CPU/ Memory boards  
DIMMs  
FC-AL disk backplane  
FC-AL disk drive  
PCI riser  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
       
Power distribution board  
Power supplies  
System controller card  
psrinfoCommand  
The psrinfocommand displays the date and time each processor came online.  
With the verbose (-v) option, the command displays additional information about  
the processors, including their clock speed. The following is sample output from the  
psrinfocommand with the -voption.  
Status of processor 0 as of: 04/11/03 12:03:45  
Processor has been on-line since 04/11/03 10:53:03.  
The sparcv9 processor operates at 900 MHz,  
and has a sparcv9 floating point processor.  
Status of processor 2 as of: 04/11/03 12:03:45  
Processor has been on-line since 04/11/03 10:53:05.  
The sparcv9 processor operates at 900 MHz,  
and has a sparcv9 floating point processor.  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-14 psrinfo-vCommand Output  
showrevCommand  
The showrevcommand displays revision information for the current hardware and  
software. CODE EXAMPLE 6-15 shows sample output of the showrevcommand.  
Hostname: abc-123  
Hostid: cc0ac37f  
Release: 5.8  
Kernel architecture: sun4u  
Application architecture: sparc  
Hardware provider: Sun_Microsystems  
Domain: Sun.COM  
Kernel version: SunOS 5.8 cstone_14:08/01/01 2001  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-15 showrevCommand Output  
98  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
When used with the -poption, this command displays installed patches.  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-16 shows a partial sample output from the showrevcommand with  
the -poption.  
Patch: 109729-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 109783-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 109807-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 109809-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 110905-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 110910-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 110914-01 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsu  
Patch: 108964-04 Obsoletes: Requires: Incompatibles: Packages: SUNWcsr  
CODE EXAMPLE 6-16 showrev-pCommand Output  
Tools and the Boot Process: A Summary  
Different diagnostic tools are available to you at different stages of the boot process.  
TABLE 6-4 summarizes what tools are available to you and when they are available.  
TABLE 6-4  
Diagnostic Tool Availability  
Available Diagnostic Tools  
Stage  
Fault Isolation  
System Monitoring  
System Exercising  
Before the operating system  
starts  
- LEDs  
- POST  
- RSC software  
–none–  
- OpenBoot commands  
- OpenBoot  
Diagnostics  
After the operating system  
starts  
- LEDs  
- RSC software  
- SunVTS  
- Sun Management Center  
- Solaris info commands  
- OpenBoot commands  
- Hardware Diagnostic  
Suite  
When the system is down  
and power is not available  
–none–  
- RSC software  
–none–  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
       
About Isolating Faults in the System  
Each of the tools available for fault isolation discloses faults in different field–  
replaceable units (FRUs). The row headings along the left of TABLE 6-5 list the FRUs  
in a Sun Fire V490 system. The available diagnostic tools are shown in column  
headings across the top. A check mark () in this table indicates that a fault in a  
particular FRU can be isolated by a particular diagnostic.  
TABLE 6-5  
FRU Coverage of Fault Isolating Tools  
LEDs  
POST  
OpenBoot Diags  
CPU/Memory Boards  
IDPROM  
DIMMs  
DVD Drive  
FC-AL Disk Drive  
Centerplane  
SC Card  
PCI Riser  
FC-AL Disk Backplane  
Power Supplies  
Fan Tray 0 (CPU)  
Fan Tray 1 (PCI)  
100 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
In addition to the FRUs listed in TABLE 6-5, there are several minor replaceable  
system components—mostly cables—that cannot directly be isolated by any system  
diagnostic. For the most part, you determine when these components are faulty by  
eliminating other possibilities. These FRUs are listed in TABLE 6-6.  
TABLE 6-6  
FRU  
FRUs Not Directly Isolated by Diagnostic Tools  
Notes  
FC-AL power cable  
FC-AL signal cable  
If OpenBoot Diagnostics tests indicate a disk problem, but replacing  
the disk does not fix the problem, you should suspect the FC-AL  
signal and power cables are either defective or improperly  
connected.  
Fan Tray 0 power  
cable  
If the system is powered on and the fan does not spin, or if the  
Power/ OK LED does not come on, but the system is up and  
running, you should suspect this cable.  
Power distribution  
board  
Any power issue that cannot be traced to the power supplies should  
lead you to suspect the power distribution board. Particular  
scenarios include:  
• The system will not power on, but the power supply LEDs  
indicate DC Present  
• System is running, but RSC indicates a missing power supply  
Removable media  
bay board and cable  
assembly  
If OpenBoot Diagnostics tests indicate a problem with the CD/ DVD  
drive, but replacing the drive does not fix the problem, you should  
suspect this assembly is either defective or improperly connected.  
System control  
switch/ power  
button cable  
If the system control switch and Power button appear unresponsive,  
you should suspect this cable is loose or defective.  
About Monitoring the System  
Sun provides two tools that can give you advance warning of difficulties and  
prevent future downtime. These are:  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC)  
Sun Management Center  
These monitoring tools let you specify system criteria that bear watching. For  
instance, you can set a threshold for system temperature and be notified if that  
threshold is exceeded.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Monitoring the System Using Remote System  
Control Software  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) software, working in conjunction with the  
system controller (SC) card, enables you to monitor and control your server over a  
serial port or a network. RSC software provides both graphical and command-line  
interfaces for remotely administering geographically distributed or physically  
inaccessible machines.  
You can also redirect the servers system console to the system controller, which lets  
you remotely run diagnostics (like POST) that would otherwise require physical  
proximity to the machines serial port.  
The system controller card runs independently, and uses standby power from the  
server. Therefore, the SC and its RSC software continue to be effective when the  
server operating system goes offline.  
RSC software lets you monitor the following on the Sun Fire V490 server.  
TABLE 6-7  
What RSC Software Monitors  
Item Monitored  
What RSC Software Reveals  
Disk drives  
Whether each slot has a drive present, and whether it reports  
OK status  
Fan trays  
Fan speed and whether the fan trays report OK status  
CPU/ Memory boards  
The presence of a CPU/ Memory board, the temperature  
measured at each processor, and any thermal warning or failure  
conditions  
Power supplies  
Whether each bay has a power supply present, and whether it  
reports OK status  
System temperature  
Server front panel  
System ambient temperature as measured at several locations in  
the system, as well as any thermal warning or failure conditions  
System control switch position and status of LEDs  
Before you can start using RSC software, you must install and configure it on the  
System Controller (RSC) Users Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
You also have to make any needed physical connections and set OpenBoot  
configuration variables that redirect the console output to the system controller. The  
latter task is described in “How to Redirect the System Console to the System  
Controller” on page 159.  
102 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For instructions on using RSC software to monitor a Sun Fire V490 system, see  
“How to Monitor the System Using the System Controller and RSC Software” on  
page 190.  
Monitoring the System Using Sun Management  
Center  
Sun Management Center software provides enterprise-wide monitoring of Sun  
servers and workstations, including their subsystems, components, and peripheral  
devices. The system being monitored must be up and running, and you need to  
install all the proper software components on various systems in your network.  
Sun Management Center lets you monitor the following on the Sun Fire V490 server.  
TABLE 6-8  
What Sun Management Center Software Monitors  
Item Monitored  
What Sun Management Center Reveals  
Disk drives  
Whether each slot has a drive present, and whether it reports  
OK status  
Fan trays  
Whether the fan trays report OK status  
CPU/ Memory boards  
The presence of a CPU/ Memory board, the temperature  
measured at each processor, and any thermal warning or failure  
conditions  
Power supplies  
Whether each bay has a power supply present, and whether it  
reports OK status  
System temperature  
System ambient temperature as measured at several locations in  
the system, as well as any thermal warning or failure conditions  
How Sun Management Center Works  
The Sun Management Center product comprises three software entities:  
Agent components  
Server component  
Monitor components  
You install agents on systems to be monitored. The agents collect system status  
information from log files, device trees, and platform-specific sources, and report  
that data to the server component.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The server component maintains a large database of status information for a wide  
range of Sun platforms. This database is updated frequently, and includes  
information about boards, tapes, power supplies, and disks as well as operating  
system parameters like load, resource usage, and disk space. You can create alarm  
thresholds and be notified when these are exceeded.  
The monitor components present the collected data to you in a standard format. Sun  
Management Center software provides both a standalone Java application and a  
Web browser-based interface. The Java interface affords physical and logical views  
of the system for highly-intuitable monitoring.  
Other Sun Management Center Features  
Sun Management Center software provides you with additional tools in the form of  
an informal tracking mechanism and an optional add-on diagnostics suite. In a  
heterogeneous computing environment, the product can interoperate with  
management utilities made by other companies.  
Informal Tracking  
Sun Management Center agent software must be loaded on any system you want to  
monitor. However, the product lets you informally track a supported platform even  
when the agent software has not been installed on it. In this case, you do not have  
full monitoring capability, but you can add the system to your browser, have Sun  
Management Center periodically check whether it is up and running, and notify you  
if it goes out of commission.  
Add-On Diagnostic Suite  
The Hardware Diagnostic Suite is available as a premium package you can purchase as  
an add-on to the Sun Management Center product. This suite lets you exercise a  
system while it is still up and running in a production environment. See “Exercising  
the System Using Hardware Diagnostic Suite” on page 108 for more information.  
Interoperability With Third-Party Monitoring Tools  
If you administer a heterogeneous network and use a third-party network-based  
system monitoring or management tool, you may be able to take advantage of Sun  
Management Center softwares support for Tivoli Enterprise Console, BMC Patrol,  
and HP Openview.  
104 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Who Should Use Sun Management Center?  
Sun Management Center software is geared primarily toward system administrators  
who have large data centers to monitor or other installations that have many  
computer platforms to monitor. If you administer a more modest installation, you  
of maintaining a significant database (typically over 700 Mbytes) of system status  
information.  
The servers being monitored must be up and running if you want to use Sun  
Management Center, since this tool relies on the Solaris OS. For instructions, see  
“How to Monitor the System Using Sun Management Center Software” on page 186.  
For detailed information about the product, see the Sun Management Center Users  
Guide.  
Obtaining the Latest Information  
For the latest information about this product, go to the Sun Management Center Web  
site at: http://www.sun.com/sunmanagementcenter.  
About Exercising the System  
It is relatively easy to detect when a system component fails outright. However,  
when a system has an intermittent problem or seems to be “behaving strangely,” a  
software tool that stresses or exercises the computers many subsystems can help  
disclose the source of the emerging problem and prevent long periods of reduced  
Sun provides two tools for exercising Sun Fire V490 systems:  
Sun Validation Test Suite (SunVTS™)  
Hardware Diagnostic Suite  
TABLE 6-9 shows the FRUs that each system exercising tool is capable of isolating.  
Note that individual tools do not necessarily test all the components or paths of a  
particular FRU.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
       
TABLE 6-9  
FRU Coverage of System Exercising Tools  
SunVTS  
Hardware Diagnostic Suite  
CPU/Memory Boards  
IDPROM  
DIMMs  
DVD Drive  
FC-AL Disk Drive  
Centerplane  
SC Card  
PCI Riser  
FC-AL Disk Backplane  
Exercising the System Using SunVTS Software  
SunVTS software validation test suite performs system and subsystem stress testing.  
You can view and control a SunVTS session over a network. Using a remote  
machine, you can view the progress of a testing session, change testing options, and  
control all testing features of another machine on the network.  
You can run SunVTS software in five different test modes:  
Connection mode – SunVTS software verifies the presence of device controllers on  
all subsystems. This typically takes no more than a few minutes and is a good  
way to “sanity check” system connections.  
Functional mode – SunVTS software exercises only the specific subsystems you  
choose. This is the default mode. In Functional mode, selected tests are run in  
parallel. This mode uses system resources heavily, so you should not run any  
other applications at the same time.  
Auto Config mode – SunVTS software automatically detects all subsystems and  
exercises them in one of two ways:  
Confidence testing –SunVTS software performs one pass of tests on all  
subsystems, and then stops. For typical system configurations, this requires  
one or two hours.  
Comprehensive testing – SunVTS software exhaustively and repeatedly tests all  
subsystems for up to 24 hours.  
106 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Exclusive mode – SunVTS software exercises only the specific subsystems you  
choose. Selected tests are run one at a time. A few tests are only available in this  
mode, including: l1dcachetest, l2cachetest, l2sramtest, mpconstest,  
mptest, qlctest, ramtest, ssptest, and systest.  
Online mode – SunVTS software exercises only the specific subsystems you choose.  
Selected tests are run one at a time until one complete system pass is achieved.  
This mode is useful for performing tests while other applications are running.  
Since SunVTS software can run many tests in parallel and consume many system  
resources, you should take care when using it on a production system. If you are  
should not run anything else on that system at the same time.  
The Sun Fire V490 server to be tested must be up and running if you want to use  
SunVTS software, since it relies on the Solaris operating system. Since SunVTS  
software packages are optional, they may not be installed on your system. Turn to  
It is important to use the most-up-to-date version of SunVTS available, to ensure you  
have the latest suite of tests. To download the most recent SunVTS software, point  
your Web browser to: http://www.sun.com/oem/products/vts/.  
For instructions on running SunVTS software to exercise the Sun Fire V490 server,  
see “How to Exercise the System Using SunVTS Software” on page 202. For more  
information about the product, see:  
SunVTS Users Guide – Describes SunVTS features as well as how to start and  
control the various user interfaces.  
SunVTS Test Reference Manual – Describes each SunVTS test, option, and  
command-line argument.  
SunVTS Quick Reference Card – Gives an overview of the main features of the  
graphical user interface (GUI).  
SunVTS Documentation Supplement – Describes the latest product enhancements  
and documentation updates not included in the SunVTS Users Guide and SunVTS  
Test Reference Manual.  
These documents are available on the Solaris Software Supplement CD and on the  
Web at: http://docs.sun.com. You should also consult the SunVTS README file  
located at /opt/SUNWvts/. This document provides late-breaking information  
about the installed version of the product.  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
SunVTS Software and Security  
During SunVTS software installation, you must choose between Basic or Sun  
Enterprise Authentication Mechanism (SEAM) security. Basic security uses a local  
security file in the SunVTS installation directory to limit the users, groups, and hosts  
permitted to use SunVTS software. SEAM security is based on Kerberos—the  
standard network authentication protocol—and provides secure user authentication,  
data integrity, and privacy for transactions over networks.  
If your site uses SEAM security, you must have the SEAM client and server software  
installed in your networked environment and configured properly in both Solaris  
and SunVTS software. If your site does not use SEAM security, do not choose the  
SEAM option during SunVTS software installation.  
If you enable the wrong security scheme during installation, or if you improperly  
configure the security scheme you choose, you may find yourself unable to run  
SunVTS tests. For more information, see the SunVTS Users Guide and the  
instructions accompanying the SEAM software.  
Exercising the System Using Hardware Diagnostic  
Suite  
Suite, which you can purchase as an add-on. The Hardware Diagnostic Suite is  
designed to exercise a production system by running tests sequentially.  
Sequential testing means the Hardware Diagnostic Suite has a low impact on the  
system. Unlike SunVTS, which stresses a system by consuming its resources with  
many parallel tests (see “Exercising the System Using SunVTS Software” on  
page 106), the Hardware Diagnostic Suite lets the server run other applications while  
testing proceeds.  
When to Run Hardware Diagnostic Suite  
The best use of the Hardware Diagnostic Suite is to disclose a suspected or  
intermittent problem with a noncritical part on an otherwise functioning machine.  
Examples might include questionable disk drives or memory modules on a machine  
that has ample or redundant disk and memory resources.  
In cases like these, the Hardware Diagnostic Suite runs unobtrusively until it  
identifies the source of the problem. The machine under test can be kept in  
production mode until and unless it must be shut down for repair. If the faulty part  
is hot-pluggable or hot-swappable, the entire diagnose-and-repair cycle can be  
completed with minimal impact to system users.  
108 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Requirements for Using Hardware Diagnostic Suite  
Since it is a part of Sun Management Center, you can only run Hardware Diagnostic  
Suite if you have set up your data center to run Sun Management Center. This  
means you have to dedicate a master server to run the Sun Management Center  
server software that supports Sun Management Center softwares database of  
platform status information. In addition, you must install and set up Sun  
Management Center agent software on the systems to be monitored. Finally, you  
need to install the console portion of Sun Management Center software, which  
serves as your interface to the Hardware Diagnostic Suite.  
Instructions for setting up Sun Management Center, as well as for using the  
Hardware Diagnostic Suite, can be found in the Sun Management Center Users Guide.  
Descriptions  
This section describes the OpenBoot Diagnostics tests and commands available to  
you. For background information about these tests, see “Stage Two: OpenBoot  
Diagnostics Tests” on page 85.  
TABLE 6-10 OpenBoot Diagnostics Menu Tests  
Test Name  
What It Does  
FRU(s) Tested  
SUNW,qlc@2  
Tests the registers of the Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop  
(FC-AL) subsystem. With diag-levelset to max, verifies  
each disk can be written to, and with test-argsset to  
media, performs more extensive disk tests.  
Centerplane,  
FC-AL disk  
backplane  
bbc@1,0  
ebus@1  
Tests all writable registers in the Boot Bus Controller. Also  
verifies that at least one system processor has Boot Bus  
access  
Centerplane  
Tests the PCI configuration registers, DMA control registers, Centerplane  
and EBus mode registers. Also tests DMA controller  
functions  
flashprom@0,0  
i2c@1,2e  
Performs a checksum test on the Boot PROM  
2
Tests segments 0–4 of the I C environmental monitoring  
Multiple. See  
“Reference for  
Decoding I2C  
Diagnostic Test  
Messages” on  
page 111.  
subsystem, which includes various temperature and other  
sensors located throughout the system  
2
i2c@1,30  
Same as above, for segment 5 of the I C environmental  
monitoring subsystem  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
     
TABLE 6-10 OpenBoot Diagnostics Menu Tests (Continued)  
Test Name  
What It Does  
FRU(s) Tested  
ide@6  
Tests the on-board IDE controller and IDE bus subsystem  
that controls the DVD drive  
PCI riser board,  
DVD drive  
network@1  
Tests the on-board Ethernet logic, running internal loopback  
tests. Can also run external loopback tests, but only if you  
install a loopback connector (not provided)  
Centerplane  
network@2  
pmc@1,300700  
rsc-  
Same as above, for the other on-board Ethernet controller  
Tests the registers of the power management controller  
Tests SC hardware, including the SC serial and Ethernet  
Centerplane  
PCI riser board  
SC card  
control@1,3062f8  
ports  
rtc@1,300070  
Tests the registers of the real-time clock and then tests the  
interrupt rates  
PCI riser board  
serial@1,400000  
usb@1,3  
Tests all possible baud rates supported by the ttyaserial  
line. Performs an internal and external loopback test on each  
line at each speed  
Centerplane,  
PCI riser board  
Tests the writable registers of the USB open host controller  
Centerplane  
TABLE 6-11 describes the commands you can type from the obdiag>prompt.  
TABLE 6-11 OpenBoot Diagnostics Test Menu Commands  
Command  
exit  
Description  
Exits OpenBoot Diagnostics tests and returns to the okprompt  
help  
Displays a brief description of each OpenBoot Diagnostics  
command and OpenBoot configuration variable  
setenvvariable value  
test-all  
Sets the value for an OpenBoot configuration variable (also  
available from the okprompt)  
Tests all devices displayed in the OpenBoot Diagnostics test  
menu (also available from the okprompt)  
test #  
Tests only the device identified by the given menu entry  
number. (A similar function is available from the okprompt.  
See “From the okPrompt: The testand test-all  
Commands” on page 87.)  
test #,#  
Tests only the devices identified by the given menu entry  
numbers  
110 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TABLE 6-11 OpenBoot Diagnostics Test Menu Commands (Continued)  
Command  
Description  
except #,#  
Tests all devices in the OpenBoot Diagnostics test menu except  
those identified by the specified menu entry numbers  
versions  
what #,#  
Displays the version, last modified date, and manufacturer of  
each self-test in the OpenBoot Diagnostics test menu and  
library  
Displays selected properties of the devices identified by menu  
entry numbers. The information provided varies according to  
device type  
Reference for Decoding I C Diagnostic  
Test Messages  
2
TABLE 6-12 describes each I C device in a Sun Fire V490 system, and helps you  
associate each I C address with the proper FRU. For more information about I C  
tests, see “I2C Bus Device Tests” on page 89.  
2
2
2
TABLE 6-12 Sun Fire V490 I C Bus Devices  
Address  
Associated FRU  
What the Device Does  
fru@0,a0  
fru@0,a2  
fru@0,a4  
fru@0,a6  
fru@0,a8  
fru@0,aa  
fru@0,ac  
fru@0,ae  
processor 0, DIMM 0  
processor 0, DIMM 1  
processor 0, DIMM 2  
processor 0, DIMM 3  
processor 0, DIMM 4  
processor 0, DIMM 5  
processor 0, DIMM 6  
processor 0, DIMM 7  
Provides configuration  
information for processor 0 DIMMs  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
TABLE 6-12 Sun Fire V490 I C Bus Devices (Continued)  
Address  
Associated FRU  
What the Device Does  
fru@1,a0  
fru@1,a2  
fru@1,a4  
fru@1,a6  
fru@1,a8  
fru@1,aa  
fru@1,ac  
fru@1,ae  
fru@2,a0  
fru@2,a2  
fru@2,a4  
fru@2,a6  
fru@2,a8  
fru@2,aa  
fru@2,ac  
fru@2,ae  
fru@3,a0  
fru@3,a2  
fru@3,a4  
fru@3,a6  
fru@3,a8  
fru@3,aa  
fru@3,ac  
fru@3,ae  
fru@4,a0  
processor 1, DIMM 0  
processor 1, DIMM 1  
processor 1, DIMM 2  
processor 1, DIMM 3  
processor 1, DIMM 4  
processor 1, DIMM 5  
processor 1, DIMM 6  
processor 1, DIMM 7  
processor 2, DIMM 0  
processor 2, DIMM 1  
processor 2, DIMM 2  
processor 2, DIMM 3  
processor 2, DIMM 4  
processor 2, DIMM 5  
processor 2, DIMM 6  
processor 2, DIMM 7  
processor 3, DIMM 0  
processor 3, DIMM 1  
processor 3, DIMM 2  
processor 3, DIMM 3  
processor 3, DIMM 4  
processor 3, DIMM 5  
processor 3, DIMM 6  
processor 3, DIMM 7  
Provides configuration  
information for processor 1 DIMMs  
Provides configuration  
information for processor 2 DIMMs  
Provides configuration  
information for processor 3 DIMMs  
CPU/ Mem board, slot A Provides configuration information for  
the CPU/ Memory board in slot A  
fru@4,a2  
CPU/ Mem Board, slot B Provides configuration information for  
the CPU/ Memory board in slot B  
nvram@4,a4  
fru@4,a8  
PCI riser  
Provides system configuration  
information (IDPROM)  
Centerplane  
Provides centerplane configuration  
information  
112 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
TABLE 6-12 Sun Fire V490 I C Bus Devices (Continued)  
Address  
Associated FRU  
What the Device Does  
fru@4,aa  
PCI riser  
Provides PCI riser board configuration  
information  
fru@5,10  
fru@5,14  
Centerplane  
RSC card  
Provides communication and control for  
I C subsystem  
2
Provides communication and control for  
the RSC card  
temperature@5,30  
temperature@5,32  
temperature@5,34  
temperature@5,52  
ioexp@5,44  
CPU/ Mem board A  
CPU/ Mem board B  
CPU/ Mem board A  
CPU/ Mem board B  
FC-AL disk backplane  
FC-AL disk backplane  
Monitors processor 0 temperature  
Monitors processor 1 temperature  
Monitors processor 2 temperature  
Monitors processor 3 temperature  
Monitors drive status/ LED control  
Monitors Loop B control  
ioexp@5,46  
ioexp@5,4c  
Power distribution board Monitors power distribution board  
status  
ioexp@5,70  
Power Supply 0  
Power Supply 1  
Centerplane  
Monitors Power Supply 0 status  
Monitors Power Supply 1 status  
Monitors I/ O port expander  
Monitors I/ O port expander  
Reserved for thermal monitoring  
ioexp@5,72  
ioexp@5,80  
ioexp@5,82  
PCI riser  
temperature@5,98  
Reserved  
temperature-  
sensor@5,9c  
FC-AL disk backplane  
Monitors ambient temperature at disk  
backplane  
fru@5,a0  
fru@5,a2  
fru@5,a6  
fru@5,a8  
fru@5,ae  
Power Supply 0  
Power Supply 1  
SC card  
Provides configuration information for  
Power Supply 0  
Provides configuration information for  
Power Supply 1  
Provides SC card configuration  
information  
FC-AL disk backplane  
Provides disk backplane configuration  
information  
Power distribution board Provides configuration information for  
the power distribution board and the  
enclosure  
fru@5,d0  
SC card  
Monitors SC cards real-time clock  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference for Terms in Diagnostic  
Output  
The status and error messages displayed by POST diagnostics and OpenBoot  
Diagnostics tests occasionally include acronyms or abbreviations for hardware sub-  
components. TABLE 6-13 is included to assist you in decoding this terminology and  
associating the terms with specific FRUs, where appropriate.  
TABLE 6-13 Abbreviations or Acronyms in Diagnostic Output  
Term  
ADC  
APC  
Description  
Associated FRU(s)  
PCI riser board  
PCI riser board  
Analog-to-Digital Converter  
Advanced Power Control – A function provided  
by the SuperIO integrated circuit  
BBC  
Boot Bus Controller – Interface between the  
Centerplane  
processors and components on many other buses  
CDX  
CRC  
Data Crossbar – Part of the system bus  
Cyclic Redundancy Check  
Centerplane  
N/ A  
DAR  
DCDS  
DMA  
Address Repeater – Part of the system bus  
Dual Data Switch – Part of the system bus  
Centerplane  
CPU/ Memory board  
PCI card  
Direct Memory Access – In diagnostic output,  
usually refers to a controller on a PCI card  
EBus  
HBA  
A byte-wide bus for low-speed devices  
Centerplane, PCI riser  
board  
Host Bus Adapter  
Centerplane, various  
others  
2
I C  
Inter-Integrated Circuit (also written as I2C) – A  
bidirectional, two-wire serial data bus. Used  
mainly for environmental monitoring and control  
Various. See  
TABLE 6-12.  
I/ O Board  
JTAG  
PCI Riser  
PCI riser  
N/ A  
Joint Test Access Group – An IEEE subcommittee  
standard (1149.1) for scanning system components  
MAC  
MII  
Media Access Controller – Hardware address of a  
device connected to a network  
Centerplane  
Centerplane  
Centerplane  
Media Independent Interface – Part of Ethernet  
controller  
Motherboard Centerplane  
114 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
TABLE 6-13 Abbreviations or Acronyms in Diagnostic Output (Continued)  
Term  
Description  
Associated FRU(s)  
NVRAM  
IDPROM  
IDPROM, located on  
PCI riser board  
OBP  
PDB  
Refers to OpenBoot firmware  
Power Distribution Board  
N/ A  
Power distribution  
board  
PMC  
POST  
RIO  
Power Management Controller  
Power-On Self-Test  
PCI riser board  
N/ A  
Multifunction integrated circuit bridging the PCI  
bus with EBus and USB  
PCI riser board  
RTC  
RX  
Real-Time Clock  
PCI riser board  
Centerplane  
Receive – Communication protocol  
Safari  
The system interconnect architecture—that is, the  
data and address buses  
CPU/ Memory board,  
centerplane  
Schizo  
Scan  
System bus to PCI bridge integrated circuit  
Centerplane  
N/ A  
A means for monitoring and altering the content  
of ASICs and system components, as provided for  
in the IEEE 1149.1 standard  
SIO  
SuperIO integrated circuit – Controls the SC  
UART port and more  
PCI riser  
TX  
Transmit – Communication protocol  
Centerplane  
UART  
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter –  
Serial port hardware  
Centerplane, PCI riser  
board, SC card  
Chapter 6 Diagnostic Tools  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
116 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PART  
III Instructions  
The six chapters within this part of the Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide use  
illustrated instructions on how to set up various components within your system,  
configure your system, and diagnose problems. Instructions within this guide are  
primarily to be used by experienced system administrators who are familiar with  
the Solaris OS and its commands.  
For detailed background information relating to the various tasks presented in Part  
Three, see the chapters in Part Two – Background.  
Chapters included in Part Three are:  
Chapter 7 – Configuring Console Access  
Chapter 8 – Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device  
Chapter 9 – Configuring System Firmware  
Chapter 10 – Isolating Failed Parts  
Chapter 11 – Monitoring the System  
Chapter 12 – Exercising the System  
Following Part Three are three appendixes of system reference information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
7
Configuring Console Access  
This chapter includes instructions on how to configure and access the system  
Tasks covered in this chapter include:  
“How to Avoid Electrostatic Discharge” on page 120  
“How to Power On the System” on page 122  
“How to Power Off the System” on page 125  
“How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126  
“How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable” on page 127  
“How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129  
“How to Verify Serial Port Settings” on page 132  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133  
“How to Configure a Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console” on  
page 135  
“How to Initiate a Reconfiguration Boot” on page 138  
Note – Many of the procedures in this chapter assume that you are familiar with the  
OpenBoot firmware and that you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment.  
For background information, see “About the okPrompt” on page 49. For  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
How to Avoid Electrostatic Discharge  
Qualified service technicians should use the following procedure to prevent static  
damage whenever they access any of the internal components of the system.  
Caution – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a  
qualified service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun  
Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun  
Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Before You Begin  
Complete this task:  
“How to Power Off the System” on page 125  
You must have the following items:  
Antistatic wrist or foot strap  
Antistatic mat  
What to Do  
Caution – Printed circuit boards and hard disk drives contain electronic  
components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity. Ordinary amounts of  
static from your clothes or the work environment can destroy components.  
Do not touch the components or any metal parts without taking proper antistatic  
precautions.  
1. Disconnect the AC power cords from the wall power outlet only when performing  
the following procedures:  
Removing and installing the power distribution board  
Removing and installing the centerplane  
Removing and installing the PCI riser board  
Removing and installing the system controller (SC) card  
Removing and installing the system control switch/ power button cable  
The AC power cord provides a discharge path for static electricity, so it should  
remain plugged in except when you are servicing the parts noted above.  
120 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Use an antistatic mat or similar surface.  
When performing any installation or service procedure, place static-sensitive parts,  
such as boards, cards, and disk drives, on an antistatic surface. The following items  
can be used as an antistatic surface:  
The bag used to wrap a Sun replacement part  
The shipping container used to package a Sun replacement part  
Sun electrostatic discharge (ESD) mat, Sun part number 250-1088 (available  
through your Sun sales representatives)  
Disposable ESD mat, shipped with replacement parts or options  
3. Use an antistatic wrist strap.  
Attach the appropriate end to the system chassis sheet metal and attach the other  
end of the strap to your wrist. Refer to the instructions that come with the strap.  
Bare metal area  
Note – Make sure that the wrist strap is in direct contact with the metal on the  
chassis.  
4. Detach both ends of the strap after you have completed the installation or service  
procedure.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
What Next  
To power on the system, complete this task:  
“How to Power On the System” on page 122  
How to Power On the System  
Do not use this power-on procedure if you have just added any new internal option  
or external storage device, or if you have removed a storage device without  
replacing it. To power on the system under those circumstances, you must initiate a  
reconfiguration boot. For those instructions, see “How to Initiate a Reconfiguration  
Boot” on page 138.  
You can also use RSC software to power on the system. For details, see:  
Sun Remote System Control (RSC) 2.2 Users Guide  
Caution – Never move the system when the system power is on. Movement can  
cause catastrophic disk drive failure. Always power off the system before moving it.  
Caution – Before you power on the system, make sure that all access panels are  
properly installed.  
What to Do  
1. Turn on power to any peripherals and external storage devices.  
Read the documentation supplied with the device for specific instructions.  
2. Turn on power to the ASCII terminal or local graphics terminal, if present.  
3. Open the media door.  
Use the system key to unlock the media door.  
122 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Media door  
4. Insert the system key into the system control switch and turn the system control  
switch to the Normal position.  
See “System Control Switch” on page 15 for information about each system control  
switch setting.  
Normal position  
Power button  
5. Press the Power button that is below the system control switch to power on the  
system.  
Note – The system may take anywhere from 30 seconds (if firmware diagnostics do  
not run) to almost 30 minutes before video is displayed on the system monitor or the  
okprompt appears on an attached terminal. This time depends on the system  
configuration (number of processors, memory modules, PCI cards) and the level of  
power-on self-test (POST) and OpenBoot Diagnostics tests being performed.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
 
6. Turn the system control switch to the Locked position.  
This prevents anyone from accidentally powering off the system.  
Locked position  
7. Remove the system key from the system control switch and keep it in a secure  
place.  
What Next  
To power off the system, complete this task:  
“How to Power Off the System” on page 125  
124 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Power Off the System  
Before You Begin  
executed system shutdown. Make sure that you have gracefully shut down any  
applications before powering off the system.  
You can also use Solaris commands, the OpenBoot firmware power-offcommand,  
or RSC software to power off the system. For details, see:  
“How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
What to Do  
1. Notify users that the system will be powered down.  
2. Back up the system files and data, if necessary.  
3. Ensure that the system control switch is in the Normal position.  
4. Press and release the Power button on the system front panel.  
The system begins a graceful software system shutdown.  
Note – Pressing and releasing the Power button initiates a graceful software system  
shutdown. Pressing and holding in the Power button for five seconds causes an  
immediate hardware shutdown. Whenever possible, you should use the graceful  
shutdown method. Forcing an immediate hardware shutdown may cause disk drive  
corruption and loss of data. Use that method only as a last resort.  
5. Wait for the front panel Power/OK LED to turn off.  
6. Turn the system control switch to the Forced Off position.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
     
Caution – Be sure to turn the system control switch to the Forced Off position  
before handling any internal components. Otherwise, it is possible for an operator at  
a system controller (SC) console to restart the system while you are working inside  
it. The Forced Off position is the only system control switch position that prevents  
an SC console from restarting the system.  
7. Remove the system key from the system control switch and keep it in a secure  
place.  
What Next  
Qualified service technicians can now continue with parts removal and installation,  
as needed.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
How to Get to the okPrompt  
Before You Begin  
This procedure provides several ways of reaching the okprompt. The methods are  
not equally desirable. For details about when to use each method, see:  
“About the okPrompt” on page 49  
Note – Dropping the Sun Fire V490 system to the okprompt suspends all  
application and operating system software. After you issue firmware commands and  
run firmware-based tests from the okprompt, the system may not be able simply to  
resume where it left off.  
126 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If at all possible, back up system data before starting this procedure. Also halt all  
applications and warn users of the impending loss of service. For information about  
the appropriate backup and shutdown procedures, see Solaris system administration  
documentation.  
What to Do  
1. Decide which method you need to use to reach the okprompt.  
See “About the okPrompt” on page 49 for details.  
2. Refer to TABLE 7-1 for instructions.  
TABLE 7-1  
Ways of Accessing the okPrompt  
Access Method  
What to Do  
Graceful halt  
• From a console window (dtterm, for example), issue an  
appropriate command (for example, the shutdown,init,  
halt, or uadmincommand) as described in Solaris system  
administration documentation.  
Stop-A (L1-A) or  
Break  
• From a Sun keyboard, hold down the Stopand Akeys  
simultaneously.  
key sequence  
–or–  
• From a connected alphanumeric terminal, press the Break key.  
Externally initiated  
reset (XIR)  
• From the system controller, type the xircommand.  
Manual system reset  
• Press the front panel Power button and hold it for five seconds.  
–or–  
• From the system controller, type the resetcommand.  
How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet  
Cable  
Before You Begin  
Complete the prerequisite installation steps in Chapter 1.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Install the server in the rack, following instructions in the Sun Fire V490 Server  
Setup and Rackmounting Guide.  
What to Do  
1. Locate the RJ-45 twisted-pair Ethernet (TPE) connector for the appropriate  
Ethernet interface—the top connector or the bottom connector.  
See “Locating Back Panel Features” on page 16. For a PCI Ethernet adapter card, see  
the documentation supplied with the card.  
2. Connect a Category-5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable to the appropriate  
RJ-45 connector.  
You should hear the connector tab click into place. The UTP cable length must not  
exceed 100 meters (328 feet).  
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 outlet to the appropriate network  
device.  
You should hear the connector tab click into place.  
Consult your network documentation if you need more information about how to  
connect to your network.  
What Next  
If you are installing your system, complete the installation procedure. Return to  
Chapter 1.  
If you are adding an additional network interface to the system, you need to  
configure that interface. See:  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
128 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Access the System Console via  
tipConnection  
Before You Begin  
The following procedure assumes you are connecting to the serial port (ttya) of the  
Sun Fire V490 system using a tipconnection from serial port B (ttyb) of another  
Sun server, and that the other Sun server has its own local graphics terminal.  
What to Do  
1. Decide whether you need to reset OpenBoot configuration variables on the Sun  
Fire V490 system.  
Certain OpenBoot configuration variables control from where system console input  
is taken and to where its output is directed.  
If you are installing a new system – The default OpenBoot configuration variable  
settings will work properly. You do not need to reset the variables. Skip to Step 3.  
If you have previously altered OpenBoot configuration variable settings – For example,  
to use the system controller as the system console, you need to change the  
OpenBoot configuration variables back to their default values. Continue with the  
next step from the existing system console.  
If you are not sure whether OpenBoot configuration variable settings have been altered –  
See “How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables” on page 178. Verify  
that the settings are as given in “Reference for System Console OpenBoot Variable  
Settings” on page 141. If not, reset them as described in the next step.  
2. If necessary, reset OpenBoot configuration variables.  
From the existing system console, type:  
ok setenv diag-out-console false  
ok setenv input-device ttya  
ok setenv output-device ttya  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
   
Note – There are many other OpenBoot configuration variables, and although these  
do not affect which hardware device is used as the system console, some of them  
affect what diagnostic tests the system runs and what messages the system console  
displays. For details, see “Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
3. Connect the RJ-45 serial cable and adapter.  
The cable and adapter connect the Sun servers ttybserial port to the Sun Fire V490  
systems built-in ttyaserial port. Pinouts, part numbers, and other details about the  
serial cable and adapter are provided in the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and  
Removal Guide.  
4. Ensure that the /etc/remotefile on the Sun server contains an entry for  
hardwire.  
Most releases of Solaris OS software shipped since 1992 contain an /etc/remote  
file with the appropriate hardwireentry. However, if the Sun server is running an  
older version of Solaris OS software, or if the /etc/remotefile has been modified,  
you may need to edit it. See “How to Modify the /etc/remoteFile” on page 131  
for details.  
5. In a terminal tool window on the Sun server, type:  
hostname% tip hardwire  
The Sun server responds by displaying:  
connected  
The terminal tool is now a tipwindow directed to the Sun Fire V490 system via the  
Sun servers ttybport. This connection is established and maintained even if the  
Sun Fire V490 system is completely powered off or just starting up.  
What Next  
Continue with your installation or diagnostic test session as appropriate. When you  
are finished using the tipwindow, end your tipsession by typing ~.(the tilde  
symbol followed by a period) and exit the window. For more information about tip  
commands, see the tipman page.  
130 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Modify the /etc/remoteFile  
You may need to perform this procedure to access the system console via a tip  
connection from a Sun server running an older version of the Solaris OS software.  
You may also need to perform this procedure if the /etc/remotefile on the Sun  
server has been altered and no longer contains an appropriate hardwireentry.  
Before You Begin  
This procedure assumes you are connecting via tipline from serial port B (ttyb) of  
a Sun server to the serial port (ttya) of the Sun Fire V490 machine.  
What to Do  
1. Determine the release level of system software installed on the Sun server.  
To do this, type:  
# uname -r  
The system responds with a release number.  
2. Do one of the following, depending on the number displayed.  
If the number displayed by the uname -rcommand is 5.0 or higher:  
The server software shipped with an appropriate entry for hardwirein the  
/etc/remotefile. If you have reason to suspect this file was altered and the  
hardwireentry modified or deleted, check the entry against the example given  
in CODE EXAMPLE 7-1, and edit it as needed.  
hardwire:\  
:dv=/dev/term/b:br#9600:el=^C^S^Q^U^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:  
CODE EXAMPLE 7-1  
Entry for hardwirein /etc/remote(Recent System Software)  
Note – If you intend to use the Sun servers serial port A rather than serial port B,  
edit this entry by replacing /dev/term/bwith /dev/term/a.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
   
If the number displayed by the uname -rcommand is less than 5.0:  
Check the /etc/remotefile and add the entry shown in CODE EXAMPLE 7-2, if it  
does not already exist.  
hardwire:\  
:dv=/dev/ttyb:br#9600:el=^C^S^Q^U^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:  
CODE EXAMPLE 7-2  
Entry for hardwirein /etc/remote(Older System Software)  
Note – If you intend to use the Sun servers serial port A rather than serial port B,  
edit this entry by replacing /dev/ttybwith /dev/ttya.  
What Next  
The /etc/remotefile is now properly configured. Continue establishing a tip  
connection to the Sun Fire V490 servers system console. See  
“How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129  
How to Verify Serial Port Settings  
This procedure lets you verify the baud rate and other serial port settings used by  
the Sun Fire V490 server to communicate with attached serial port devices.  
Before You Begin  
You must be logged in to the Sun Fire V490 server, and the server must be running  
Solaris OS software.  
What to Do  
1. Open a terminal tool window.  
132 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Type:  
# eeprom ttya-mode  
3. Look for the following output:  
ttya-mode = 9600,8,n,1,-  
This line indicates that the Sun Fire V490 servers serial port is configured for:  
9600 baud  
8 bits  
No parity  
1 stop bit  
No handshake protocol  
What Next  
For more information about serial port settings, see the eepromman page. For  
instructions on setting the ttya-modeOpenBoot configuration variable, see  
“How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables” on page 180  
How to Set Up an Alphanumeric  
Terminal as the System Console  
Before You Begin  
To perform initial installation of the system, you need to attach an alphanumeric  
(ASCII) terminal to the server. Alternatively, you can create a tipconnection from  
another Sun system. For instructions, see “How to Access the System Console via  
tipConnection” on page 129.  
After initial installation of Solaris OS software, if you have reconfigured the system  
console to take its input and output from different devices, you can follow this  
procedure to change back to using an alphanumeric terminal as the system console.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
         
For detailed information about system console options, see “About Communicating  
With the System” on page 69.  
What to Do  
1. Attach one end of the serial cable to the alphanumeric terminals serial port.  
Use an RJ-45 null modem serial cable or an RJ-45 serial cable and null modem  
adapter. Plug this into the terminals serial port connector.  
2. Attach the opposite end of the serial cable to the Sun Fire V490 system.  
Plug the cable into the systems built-in serial port (ttya) connector.  
3. Connect the alphanumeric terminals power cord to an AC outlet.  
4. Set the alphanumeric terminal to receive:  
At 9600 baud  
An 8-bit signal with no parity and 1 stop bit  
See the documentation accompanying your terminal for information about how to  
configure it.  
5. Decide whether you need to reset OpenBoot configuration variables.  
Certain OpenBoot configuration variables control from where system console input  
is taken and to where its output is directed.  
If you are installing a new system – The default OpenBoot configuration variable  
settings will work properly. You are done with this procedure and can skip the  
remaining steps.  
If you have previously altered OpenBoot configuration variable settings – For example,  
to use the system controller as the system console, you need to change the  
OpenBoot configuration variables back to their default values. Continue with the  
next step from the existing system console.  
If you are not sure whether OpenBoot configuration variable settings have been altered –  
See “How to View and Set OpenBoot Configuration Variables” on page 180. Verify  
that the settings are as given in “Reference for System Console OpenBoot Variable  
Settings” on page 141. If not, reset them as described in the next step.  
6. If necessary, reset OpenBoot configuration variables.  
From the existing system console, type:  
ok setenv diag-out-console false  
ok setenv input-device ttya  
ok setenv output-device ttya  
134 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note – There are many other OpenBoot configuration variables, and although these  
do not affect which hardware device is used as the system console, some of them  
affect what diagnostic tests the system runs and what messages the system console  
displays. For details, see “Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
7. To cause the changes to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
The system permanently stores the parameter changes and boots automatically if the  
OpenBoot variable auto-boot?is set to true(its default value).  
What Next  
You can issue system commands and view system messages on the ASCII terminal.  
Qualified service technicians can now continue with parts removal and installation,  
as needed.  
Note – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a qualified  
service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun Fire V490  
Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490  
Documentation CD.  
How to Configure a Local Graphics  
Terminal as the System Console  
Before You Begin  
After initial system installation, a qualified service technician can install a local  
graphics terminal and set it up as the system console. You cannot use a local graphics  
terminal to perform initial system installation, nor can you use a local graphics  
terminal to view power-on self-test (POST) messages. For detailed information about  
system console options, see “About Communicating With the System” on page 69.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
     
To install a local graphics terminal, you must have:  
A supported PCI-based graphics frame buffer card and software driver  
An 8-Bit Color Graphics PCI adapter frame buffer card (Sun part number  
X3660A is currently supported)  
An 8/ 24-Bit Color Graphics PCI adapter frame buffer card (Sun part number  
X3768A is currently supported)  
A monitor with appropriate resolution  
A Sun-compatible USB keyboard (Sun USB Type–6 keyboard)  
A Sun-compatible USB mouse (Sun USB mouse) and mouse pad (if necessary)  
What to Do  
1. Install the graphics card into an appropriate PCI slot.  
Installation must be performed by a qualified service provider. For further  
information, see the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide or  
contact your qualified service provider.  
2. Attach the monitor video cable to the graphics cards video port.  
Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the connection.  
3. Connect the monitors power cord to an AC outlet.  
4. Connect the keyboard USB cable to any USB port on the back panel.  
136 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Connect the mouse USB cable to any USB port on the back panel.  
6. Set OpenBoot configuration variables appropriately.  
From the existing system console, type:  
ok setenv diag-out-console false  
ok setenv input-device keyboard  
ok setenv output-device screen  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
 
Note – There are many other OpenBoot configuration variables, and although these  
do not affect which hardware device is used as the system console, some of them  
affect what diagnostic tests the system runs and what messages the system console  
displays. For details, see “Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
7. To cause the changes to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
The system permanently stores the parameter changes and boots automatically if the  
OpenBoot variable auto-boot?is set to true(its default value).  
What Next  
You can issue system commands and view system messages from your local  
graphics terminal. Continue with your diagnostic or other procedure as needed.  
How to Initiate a Reconfiguration Boot  
After installing any new internal option or external storage device, you must  
perform a reconfiguration boot so that the operating system is able to recognize the  
newly installed device(s). In addition, if you remove any device and do not install a  
replacement device prior to rebooting the system, you must perform a  
reconfiguration boot in order for the operating system to recognize the configuration  
change. This requirement also applies to any component that is connected to the  
systems I2C bus, including memory modules, CPU/ Memory boards, and power  
supplies.  
This requirement does not apply to any component that is:  
Installed or removed as part of a hot-plug or hot-swap operation  
Installed or removed before the operating system is installed  
Installed as an identical replacement for a component that is already recognized  
by the operating system  
138 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Before You Begin  
graphics terminal, or a tipconnection to the Sun Fire V490 system. See:  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133  
“How to Configure a Local Graphics Terminal as the System Console” on  
page 135  
“How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129  
What to Do  
1. Turn on power to any peripherals and external storage devices.  
Read the documentation supplied with the device for specific instructions.  
2. Turn on power to the ASCII terminal or local graphics terminal.  
3. Insert the system key into the system control switch and turn the switch to the  
Diagnostics position.  
See “System Control Switch” on page 15 for information about control switch  
settings.  
4. Press the Power button below the control switch to power on the system.  
5. Wait for the okprompt to appear.  
The system may take anywhere from 15 to 30 minutes before the okprompt appears.  
This time depends on the system configuration (number of processors, memory  
modules, PCI cards) being tested.  
6. Turn the system control switch to the Normal position.  
7. At the okprompt, type:  
ok reset-all  
Depending on how the auto-bootOpenBoot configuration variable is set, the  
system may or may not start to reboot its operating system.  
8. If the operating system starts to reboot, do the following.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
 
a. Wait until the system has completed initializing memory.  
During initialization, you see the message:  
Initializing memory  
b. Watch carefully, as you will need to act quickly.  
Once the process is complete, the Initializing memorymessage is erased and  
the system displays a line similar to:  
Boot device: disk2 File and args:  
c. At this point, abort the boot process as promptly as possible.  
To do this, use one of the following methods:  
Hold down the Stop (or L1) key and press A on your keyboard.  
Press the Break key on the terminal keyboard.  
Type ~#in a tipwindow.  
The system should return to the okprompt.  
Note – If the system does not return to the okprompt, it means you did not abort  
quickly enough. If this occurs, wait for the system to reboot, force the system to  
return to the okprompt, and repeat Step 7.  
9. At the okprompt, type:  
ok boot -r  
The boot -rcommand rebuilds the device tree for the system, incorporating any  
newly installed options so that the operating system will recognize them.  
10. Turn the control switch to the Locked position, remove the key, and keep it in a  
secure place.  
This prevents anyone from accidentally powering off the system.  
What Next  
The systems front panel LED indicators provide power-on status information.  
For more information about the system LEDs, see:  
“LED Status Indicators” on page 13  
140 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reference for System Console OpenBoot  
Variable Settings  
Certain OpenBoot configuration variables control from where system console input  
is taken and to where its output is directed. The table below shows how to set these  
variables in order to use ttya, the system controller, or a local graphics terminal as  
the system console.  
TABLE 7-2  
OpenBoot Configuration Variables That Affect the System Console  
Setting for Sending System Console Output to:  
1 2  
OpenBoot Variable Name  
diag-out-console  
output-device  
Serial Port (ttya)  
false  
System Controller  
true  
Graphics Terminal  
false  
ttya  
rsc-console  
rsc-console  
screen  
input-device  
ttya  
keyboard  
1 – POST output will still be directed to the serial port, as POST has no mechanism to direct its output to a  
graphics terminal.  
2 – If the system detects no local graphics terminal, it directs all output to (and accepts input from) the serial  
port.  
In addition to the above OpenBoot configuration variables, there are other variables  
that determine whether and what kinds of diagnostic tests run. These variables are  
discussed in “Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
Chapter 7 Configuring Console Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
     
142 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
8
Configuring Network Interfaces and  
the Boot Device  
This chapter provides information and instructions that are required to plan and to  
configure the supported network interfaces.  
Tasks covered in this chapter include:  
“How to Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144  
“How to Select the Boot Device” on page 149  
Note – Many of the procedures in this chapter assume that you are familiar with the  
OpenBoot firmware and that you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment.  
For background information, see “About the okPrompt” on page 49. For  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
Caution – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a  
qualified service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the  
Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the  
Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How to Configure the Primary Network  
Interface  
You must perform this task:  
Complete the installation steps in Chapter 1.  
For background information, see:  
“About the Network Interfaces” on page 47  
If you are using a PCI network interface card, see the documentation supplied with  
the card.  
What to Do  
1. Choose a network port, using the following table as a guide.  
Ethernet Port  
PCI C/ 66 MHz  
PCI D/ 33 MHz  
1
0
net1  
net0  
/ pci@9,600000/ network@1  
/ pci@9,700000/ network@2  
2. Attach an Ethernet cable to the port you selected.  
See “How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable” on page 127.  
3. Choose a host name for the system and make a note of it.  
You need to furnish the name in a later step.  
The host name must be unique within the network. It can consist only of  
alphanumeric characters and the dash (-). Do not use a dot in the host name. Do not  
begin the name with a number or a special character. The name must not be longer  
than 30 characters.  
144 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Determine the unique Internet Protocol (IP) address of the network interface and  
make a note of it.  
You need to furnish the address in a later step.  
An IP address must be assigned by the network administrator. Each network device  
or interface must have a unique IP address.  
5. Resume the installation of the system.  
Return to Chapter 1.  
Note – During installation of the Solaris OS, the software automatically detects the  
for which native Solaris device drivers exist. The operating system then asks you to  
select one of the interfaces as the primary network interface and prompts you for its  
host name and IP address. You can configure only one network interface during  
installation of the operating system. You must configure any additional interfaces  
separately, after the operating system is installed. For more information, see “How  
to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146.  
What Next  
After completing this procedure, the primary network interface is ready for  
operation. However, in order for other network devices to communicate with the  
system, you must enter the systems IP address and host name into the namespace  
on the network name server. For information about setting up a network name  
service, consult:  
Solaris Naming Configuration Guide for your specific Solaris release  
The device driver for the systems on-board Sun GigaSwift Ethernet interfaces is  
automatically installed with the Solaris release. For information about operating  
characteristics and configuration parameters for this driver, refer to the following  
document:  
Platform Notes: The Sun GigaSwift Ethernet Device Driver  
This document is available on the Solaris Software Supplement CD for your specific  
Solaris release.  
If you want to set up an additional network interface, you must configure it  
separately, after installing the operating system. See:  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
Chapter 8 Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
   
Note – The Sun Fire V490 system conforms to the Ethernet 10/ 100BASE-T standard,  
which states that the Ethernet 10BASE-T link integrity test function should always  
be enabled on both the host system and the Ethernet hub. If you have problems  
establishing a connection between this system and your hub, verify that the Ethernet  
hub also has the link test function enabled. Consult the manual provided with your  
hub for more information about the link integrity test function.  
How to Configure Additional Network  
Interfaces  
Perform the following tasks to prepare an additional network interface:  
Install the Sun Fire V490 server as described in Chapter 1.  
Network Interfaces” on page 48.  
If you need to install a PCI network interface card, follow the installation  
instructions in the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide.  
Attach an Ethernet cable to the appropriate port on the system back panel. See  
“How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable” on page 127. If you are using a  
PCI network interface card, see the documentation supplied with the card.  
Note – All internal options (except disk drives and power supplies) must be  
installed by qualified service personnel. Installation procedures for these  
components are covered in the Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal  
Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
146 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
What to Do  
1. Choose a network host name for each new interface.  
The host name must be unique within the network. It can consist only of  
alphanumeric characters and the dash (-). Do not use a dot in the host name. Do not  
begin the name with a number or a special character. The name must not be longer  
than 30 characters.  
Usually an interface host name is based on the machine host name. For example, if  
the machine is assigned the host name sunrise, the added network interface could  
be named sunrise-1. The machines host name is assigned when Solaris software  
is installed. For more information, see the installation instructions accompanying the  
Solaris software.  
2. Determine the Internet Protocol (IP) address for each new interface.  
network must have a unique IP address.  
3. Boot the operating system (if it is not already running) and log on to the system as  
superuser.  
Be sure to perform a reconfiguration boot if you just added a new PCI network  
interface card. See “How to Initiate a Reconfiguration Boot” on page 138.  
Type the sucommand at the system prompt, followed by the superuser password:  
% su  
Password:  
4. Create an appropriate /etc/hostnamefile for each new network interface.  
The name of the file you create should be of the form /etc/hostname.cenum,  
where ceis the network interface type identifier and num is the device instance  
number of the interface according to the order in which it was installed in the  
system.  
For example, the file names for the systems on-board Sun GigaSwift Ethernet  
interfaces are /etc/hostname.ce0and /etc/hostname.ce1, respectively. If you  
add a PCI Ethernet adapter card as a third ceinterface, its file name should be  
/etc/hostname.ce2. At least one of these files—the primary network  
interface—should exist already, having been created automatically during the Solaris  
installation process.  
Note – The documentation accompanying the network interface card should  
identify its type. Alternatively, you can enter the show-devscommand from the ok  
prompt to obtain a list of all installed devices.  
Chapter 8 Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
5. Edit the /etc/hostnamefile(s) created in Step 4 to add the host name(s)  
determined in Step 1.  
Following is an example of the /etc/hostnamefiles required for a system called  
sunrise, which has two on-board Sun GigaSwift Ethernet interfaces (ce0and ce1)  
and a PCI Ethernet adapter card (ce2). A network connected to the on-board ce0  
and ce1interfaces will know the system as sunriseand sunrise-1, while  
networks connected to the PCI-based ce2interface will know the system as  
sunrise-2.  
sunrise # cat /etc/hostname.ce0  
sunrise  
sunrise # cat /etc/hostname.ce1  
sunrise-1  
sunrise # cat /etc/hostname.ce2  
sunrise-2  
6. Create an entry in the /etc/hostsfile for each active network interface.  
An entry consists of the IP address and the host name for each interface.  
The following example shows an /etc/hostsfile with entries for the three network  
interfaces used as examples in this procedure.  
sunrise # cat /etc/hosts  
#
# Internet host table  
#
127.0.0.1  
localhost  
129.144.10.57 sunrise loghost  
129.144.14.26 sunrise-1  
129.144.11.83 sunrise-2  
7. Manually plumb and enable each new interface using the ifconfigcommand.  
For example, for the interface ce2, type:  
sunrise # ifconfig ce2 plumb up  
For more information, see the ifconfig(1M)man page.  
148 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What Next  
After completing this procedure, any new network interfaces are ready for  
operation. However, in order for other network devices to communicate with the  
system through the new interface, the IP address and host name for each new  
interface must be entered into the namespace on the network name server. For  
information about setting up a network name service, consult:  
Solaris Naming Configuration Guide for your specific Solaris release  
The cedevice driver for the systems on-board Sun GigaSwift Ethernet interfaces is  
automatically configured during Solaris installation. For information about  
operating characteristics and configuration parameters for these drivers, refer to  
Platform Notes: The Sun GigaSwift Ethernet Device Driver  
This document is available on the Solaris Software Supplement CD for your specific  
Solaris release.  
Note – The Sun Fire V490 system conforms to the Ethernet 10/ 100BASE-T standard,  
which states that the Ethernet 10BASE-T link integrity test function should always  
be enabled on both the host system and the Ethernet hub. If you have problems  
establishing a connection between this system and your Ethernet hub, verify that the  
hub also has the link test function enabled. Consult the manual provided with your  
hub for more information about the link integrity test function.  
How to Select the Boot Device  
The boot device is specified by the setting of an OpenBoot firmware configuration  
parameter called boot-device. The default setting of this parameter is disk net.  
Because of this setting, the firmware first attempts to boot from the system hard  
drive, and if that fails, from the on-board Sun GigaSwift Ethernet  
interface.Before You Begin  
Before you can select a boot device, you must complete system installation according  
to the instructions in Chapter 1.  
Chapter 8 Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
           
Specifically, you must set up a system console and power on the system. See:  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133  
page 135  
If you want to boot from a network, you must also connect the network interface to  
the network and configure the network interfaces. See:  
“How to Attach a Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable” on page 127  
“How to Configure the Primary Network Interface” on page 144  
“How to Configure Additional Network Interfaces” on page 146  
What to Do  
This procedure assumes that you are familiar with the OpenBoot firmware and that  
you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment. For more information, see  
“About the okPrompt” on page 49.  
At the okprompt, type:  
ok setenv boot-device device-specifier  
where the device-specifier is one of the following:  
cdrom– Specifies the DVD-ROM drive  
disk– Specifies the system boot disk  
disk0– Specifies internal disk 0  
disk1– Specifies internal disk 1  
net, net0, net1– Specifies the network interfaces  
full path name – Specifies the device or network interface by its full path name  
Note – You can also specify the name of the program to be booted as well as the  
way the boot program operates. For more information, see the OpenBoot 4.x  
Command Reference Manual, included with the Solaris Software Supplement CD that  
ships with Solaris software.  
150 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to specify a network interface other than an on-board Ethernet interface  
as the default boot device, you can determine the full path name of each interface by  
typing:  
ok show-devs  
The show-devscommand lists the system devices and displays the full path name  
of each PCI device.  
What Next  
For more information about using the OpenBoot firmware, see:  
OpenBoot 4.x Command Reference Manual, included with the Solaris Software  
Supplement CD that ships with Solaris software. This manual is also is available  
at the Web site http://docs.sun.comunder Solaris on Sun Hardware.  
Chapter 8 Configuring Network Interfaces and the Boot Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
   
152 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
9
Configuring System Firmware  
This chapter describes OpenBoot firmware commands and configuration variables  
available for configuring the following aspects of Sun Fire V490 system behavior:  
OpenBoot environmental monitoring  
“How to Obtain ASR Status Information” on page 158  
“How to Redirect the System Console to the System Controller” on page 159  
“How to Restore the Local System Console” on page 161  
“How to Deconfigure a Device Manually” on page 162  
“How to Reconfigure a Device Manually” on page 163  
“How to Implement Stop-N Functionality” on page 164  
Note – Many of the procedures in this chapter assume that you are familiar with the  
OpenBoot firmware and that you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment.  
For background information, see “About the okPrompt” on page 49. For  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
How to Enable OpenBoot Environmental  
Monitoring  
Before You Begin  
For background information about the OpenBoot environmental monitor, see:  
“About OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 52  
What to Do  
To enable OpenBoot environmental monitoring, type env-onat the okprompt.:  
ok env-on  
Environmental monitor is ON  
ok  
What Next  
To disable OpenBoot environmental monitoring, complete this task:  
“How to Disable OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 154  
How to Disable OpenBoot  
Environmental Monitoring  
Before You Begin  
For background information about the OpenBoot environmental monitor, see:  
“About OpenBoot Environmental Monitoring” on page 52  
154 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
What to Do  
To disable OpenBoot environmental monitoring, type env-offat the okprompt:  
ok env-off  
Environmental monitor is OFF  
ok  
How to Obtain OpenBoot  
Environmental Status Information  
Before You Begin  
For background information about environmental status information, see:  
“OpenBoot Environmental Status Information” on page 53  
What to Do  
To obtain OpenBoot environmental status information, type .envat the ok  
prompt:  
ok .env  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
   
How to Enable the Watchdog  
Mechanism and Its Options  
Before You Begin  
For background information about the hardware watchdog mechanism and related  
externally initiated reset (XIR) functionality, see:  
“Hardware Watchdog Mechanism and XIR” on page 23  
What to Do  
1. Edit the /etc/systemfile to include the following entry.  
set watchdog_enable = 1  
2. Choose the desired system recovery behavior.  
The hardware watchdog mechanism can automatically reboot the system in case the  
system hangs. This can be done with or without first generating an automated crash  
dump file. As superuser, do one of the following:  
To reboot without generating an automated crash dump file, type:  
# eeprom error-reset-recovery=boot  
To reboot and generate an automated crash dump file, type:  
# eeprom error-reset-recovery=sync  
To have the system not automatically reboot, but rather wait at the OpenBoot  
prompt for manual intervention and recovery, type:  
# eeprom error-reset-recovery=none  
156 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Restart the system to effect the changes. Type:  
# reboot  
What Next  
If you choose to have the system generate an automated crash dump file, then, in the  
event the operating system hangs, that file appears in the /var/crash/directory,  
under a subdirectory named after your system. For more information, see the  
documentation accompanying your Solaris software release.  
How to Enable ASR  
The automatic system recovery (ASR) feature is activated by default. However, if  
you have manually disabled it, use this procedure to restore it.  
What to Do  
1. Set the system control switch to the Normal position.  
2. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok setenv service-mode? false  
ok setenv auto-boot? true  
ok setenv auto-boot-on-error? true  
3. Set the diag-triggervariable either to power-on-reset, error-reset, (the  
default) or to all-resets. For example, type:  
ok setenv diag-trigger all-resets  
4. To cause the parameter changes to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
     
The system permanently stores the parameter changes and boots automatically if the  
OpenBoot variable auto-boot?is set to true(its default value).  
What Next  
To disable ASR, complete this task:  
“How to Disable ASR” on page 158  
How to Disable ASR  
After you disable the automatic system recovery (ASR) feature, it is not activated  
again until you enable it at the system okprompt.  
What to Do  
1. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok setenv auto-boot-on-error? false  
2. To cause the parameter change to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
The system permanently stores the parameter change.  
How to Obtain ASR Status Information  
Use the following procedure to retrieve information about the status of the  
automatic system recovery (ASR) feature.  
158 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
What to Do  
1. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok .asr  
In the .asrcommand output, any devices marked disabledhave been manually  
deconfigured using the asr-disablecommand. The .asrcommand also lists  
devices that have failed firmware diagnostics and have been automatically  
deconfigured by the OpenBoot ASR feature.  
2. Display components that have failed POST diagnostics. Type:  
ok show-post-results  
3. Display components that have failed OpenBoot diagnostics tests. Type:  
ok show-obdiag-results  
What Next  
For more information, see:  
“About Automatic System Recovery” on page 55  
“How to Enable ASR” on page 157  
“How to Disable ASR” on page 158  
“How to Deconfigure a Device Manually” on page 162  
“How to Reconfigure a Device Manually” on page 163  
How to Redirect the System Console  
Perform this procedure if, after installing the Solaris OS and the Sun Remote System  
Controller (RSC) software, you want to configure the system to use the system  
controller as the system console. For more information about RSC software, see:  
“About the System Controller (SC) Card” on page 33  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
   
What to Do  
1. Establish a system controller session.  
For instructions, see the Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide, which is  
included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
2. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok setenv diag-out-console true  
ok setenv input-device rsc-console  
ok setenv output-device rsc-console  
3. To cause the changes to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
The system permanently stores the parameter changes and boots automatically if the  
OpenBoot variable auto-boot?is set to true(its default value).  
4. To connect to the system console, at the system controller prompt, type:  
rsc> console  
Note – To reverse the system controller console redirection manually and temporarily  
by resetting OpenBoot configuration variables, follow the instructions in “About  
OpenBoot Emergency Procedures” on page 54. Otherwise follow the system  
controller console exit steps in the section, “How to Restore the Local System  
Console” on page 161.  
What Next  
For instructions on how to use RSC software, see:  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide, which is included on the Sun Fire  
V490 Documentation CD  
160 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Restore the Local System  
Perform this procedure if your system is configured to use the system controller (SC)  
as the system console and you need to redirect the system console to a local graphics  
terminal, alphanumeric terminal, or an established tipconnection. For more  
information about RSC software, see:  
“About the System Controller (SC) Card” on page 33  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
What to Do  
1. Set the input and output device. Do one of the following.  
To restore the local console to the ttyaport, type:  
ok setenv input-device ttya  
ok setenv output-device ttya  
ok setenv diag-out-console false  
The above settings are appropriate for viewing system console output on either an  
alphanumeric terminal or a tipline connected to serial port ttya.  
To restore local console to a graphics terminal, type:  
ok setenv input-device keyboard  
ok setenv output-device screen  
ok setenv diag-out-console false  
The above settings are appropriate for viewing system console output on a graphics  
terminal connected to a frame buffer card.  
2. To cause the changes to take effect, type:  
ok reset-all  
The system permanently stores the parameter changes and boots automatically if the  
OpenBoot variable auto-boot?is set to true(its default value).  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
     
What Next  
You can now issue commands and view system messages on the local console.  
How to Deconfigure a Device Manually  
Before You Begin  
OpenBoot firmware provides the asr-disablecommand, which lets you manually  
deconfigure system devices. This command “marks” a specified device as disabled,  
by creating an appropriate “status” property in the corresponding device tree node.  
By convention, UNIX will not activate a driver for any device so marked. For  
background information, see  
“About Manually Configuring Devices” on page 59  
What to Do  
1. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok asr-disable device-identifier  
where the device-identifier is one of the following:  
Any full physical device path as reported by the OpenBoot show-devscommand  
Any valid device alias as reported by the OpenBoot devaliascommand  
An identifier for a device given in “Reference for Device Identifiers” on page 61  
Note – Manually deconfiguring a single processor causes the entire CPU/ Memory  
board to be deconfigured, including all processors and all memory residing on the  
board.  
OpenBoot configuration variable changes take effect after the next system reset.  
162 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. To effect the changes immediately, type:  
ok reset-all  
Note – To immediately effect the changes, you can also power cycle the system  
using the front panel Power button  
How to Reconfigure a Device Manually  
Before You Begin  
You can use the OpenBoot asr-enablecommand to reconfigure any device that  
you previously deconfigured with asr-disable. For background information, see  
“About Manually Configuring Devices” on page 59  
What to Do  
1. At the system okprompt, type:  
ok asr-enable device-identifier  
where the device-identifier is one of the following:  
Any full physical device path as reported by the OpenBoot show-devscommand  
Any valid device alias as reported by the OpenBoot devaliascommand  
An identifier for a device or a range of devices given in “Reference for Device  
Identifiers” on page 61  
2. Do one of the following:  
If you are reconfiguring a processor, power cycle the system using the front panel  
Power button.  
If you are reconfiguring any other device, type:  
ok reset-all  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
     
Note – To reconfigure a processor, you must power cycle the system. The  
reset-allcommand will not suffice to bring the processor back online.  
How to Implement Stop-N Functionality  
Before You Begin  
temporarily resetting OpenBoot configuration variables to their default settings. This  
procedure is most useful if you have not configured your Sun Fire V490 system to  
run diagnostic tests. You might find it more convenient to use the alternative method  
of placing the system control switch in the Diagnostics position. For more  
background, see:  
“About OpenBoot Emergency Procedures” on page 54  
For information about the system control switch, see:  
“System Control Switch” on page 15  
What to Do  
1. Turn on the power to the system.  
If POST diagnostics are configured to run, both the Fault and Locator LEDs on the  
front panel will blink slowly.  
2. Wait until only the system Fault LED begins to blink rapidly.  
Note – If you have configured the Sun Fire V490 system to run diagnostic tests, this  
could take upwards of 30 minutes.  
164 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Press the front panel Power button twice, with no more than a short, one-second  
delay in between presses.  
A screen similar to the following is displayed to indicate that you have temporarily  
reset OpenBoot configuration variables to their default values:  
Setting NVRAM parameters to default values.  
Probing I/O buses  
Sun Fire V490, No Keyboard  
Copyright 1998-2004 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
OpenBoot x.x, xxxx MB memory installed, Serial #xxxxxxxx.  
Ethernet address x:x:x:x:x:x, Host ID: xxxxxxxx.  
System is operating in Safe Mode and initialized with factory  
default configuration. No actual NVRAM configuration variables  
have been changed; values may be displayed with ’printenv’ and set  
with ’setenv’. System will resume normal initialization and  
configuration after the next hardware or software reset.  
ok  
Note – Once the front panel LEDs stop blinking and the Power/ OK LED stays lit,  
pressing the Power button again will begin a graceful shutdown of the system.  
What Next  
During the execution of OpenBoot firmware code, all OpenBoot configuration  
variables—including the ones that are likely to cause problems, such as input and  
output device settings—are temporarily set to “safe” factory default values. The  
only exception to this is auto-boot, which is set to false.  
By the time the system displays the okprompt, OpenBoot configuration variables  
have been returned to their original, and possibly misconfigured, values. These  
values do not take effect until the system is reset. You can display them with the  
printenvcommand and manually change them with the setenvcommand.  
If you do nothing other than reset the system at this point, no values are  
permanently changed. All your customized OpenBoot configuration variable  
settings are retained, even ones that may have caused problems.  
Chapter 9 Configuring System Firmware  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
     
To correct such problems, you must either manually change individual OpenBoot  
configuration variables using the setenvcommand, or else type set-defaultsto  
permanently restore the default settings for all OpenBoot configuration variables.  
166 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
10  
Isolating Failed Parts  
The most important use of diagnostic tools is to isolate a failed hardware component  
so that a qualified service technician can quickly remove and replace it. Because  
servers are complex machines with many failure modes, there is no single diagnostic  
tool that can isolate all hardware faults under all conditions. However, Sun provides  
a variety of tools that can help you discern what component needs replacing.  
tools to reveal a failed part in your Sun Fire V490 server. It also explains how to use  
Tasks covered in this chapter include:  
“How to Operate the Locator LED” on page 168  
“How to Put the Server in Service Mode” on page 170  
“How to Isolate Faults Using POST Diagnostics” on page 175  
“How to Isolate Faults Using Interactive OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests” on  
page 177  
“How to View Diagnostic Test Results After the Fact” on page 179  
Other information in this chapter includes:  
“Reference for Choosing a Fault Isolation Tool” on page 181  
If you want background information about the tools, turn to the section:  
“About Isolating Faults in the System” on page 100  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note – Many of the procedures in this chapter assume that you are familiar with the  
OpenBoot firmware and that you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment.  
For background information, see “About the okPrompt” on page 49. For  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
Caution – Do not attempt to access any internal components unless you are a  
qualified service technician. Detailed service instructions can be found in the Sun  
Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the Sun  
Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
How to Operate the Locator LED  
The Locator LED helps you quickly to find a specific system among dozens of  
systems in a room. For background information about system LEDs, see “LED Status  
Indicators” on page 13.  
You can turn the Locator LED on and off either from the system console, the system  
controller (SC) command–line interface (CLI), or by using RSC softwares graphical  
user interface (GUI).  
Note – It is also possible to use Sun Management Center software to turn the  
Locator LED on and off. Consult Sun Management Center documentation for details.  
Before You Begin  
Either log in as root, or access the RSC softwares graphical user interface.  
What to Do  
1. Turn the Locator LED on.  
Do one of the following:  
168 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
As root, type:  
# /usr/sbin/locator -n  
At the SC command-line interface, type:  
From the RSC softwares main GUI screen, click the representation of the  
Locator LED.  
See the illustration under Step 5 in “How to Monitor the System Using the System  
Controller and RSC Software. With each click, the LED will change state from off  
to on, or vice versa.  
2. Turn the Locator LED off.  
Do one of the following:  
As root, type:  
# /usr/sbin/locator -f  
At the system console as accessed through the system controller, type:  
From the RSC softwares main GUI screen, click the representation of the  
Locator LED.  
See the illustration under Step 5 in “How to Monitor the System Using the System  
Controller and RSC Software. With each click, the LED will change state from on  
to off, or vice versa.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
 
How to Put the Server in Service Mode  
Before You Begin  
In normal mode, firmware-based diagnostic tests can be configured (and even  
disabled) to expedite the servers startup process. If you have set OpenBoot  
configuration variables to bypass diagnostic tests, you can always reset those  
variables to their default values to run tests.  
Alternatively, putting the server into service mode according to the following  
procedure ensures that POST and OpenBoot Diagnostics tests do run during startup.  
For a full description of service mode, see:  
OpenBoot PROM Enhancements for Diagnostic Operation  
This document is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
What to Do  
1. Set up a console for viewing diagnostic messages.  
Access the system console using an ASCII terminal or tipline. For information on  
system console options, see “About Communicating With the System” on page 69.  
2. Do one of the following, whichever is more convenient:  
Set the servers system control switch to the Diagnostics position.  
Set the service-mode?OpenBoot configuration variable to true. Type:  
ok setenv service-mode? true  
If either of these switches is set as described, the next reset will cause diagnostic  
tests to run at Sun-specified coverage, levels, and verbosity.  
3. Type:  
ok reset-all  
170 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What Next  
Should you want to restore the system to normal mode in order to control the depth  
of diagnostic coverage, the tests run, and the verbosity of the output, see:  
“How to Put the Server in Normal Mode” on page 171.  
How to Put the Server in Normal Mode  
If you have set the server to run in service mode, you can follow this procedure to  
return the system to normal mode. Putting the system in normal mode allows you  
control over diagnostic testing. For more information, see:  
“Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82.  
What To Do  
1. Set up a console for viewing diagnostic messages.  
Access the system console using an ASCII terminal or tipline. For information on  
system console options, see “About Communicating With the System” on page 69.  
2. Turn the system control switch to the Normal position.  
3. At the okprompt, type:  
ok setenv service-mode? false  
The system will not actually enter normal mode until the next reset.  
4. Type:  
ok reset-all  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
 
What Next  
For detailed descriptions of service and normal modes, see:  
OpenBoot PROM Enhancements for Diagnostic Operation  
This document is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
How to Isolate Faults Using LEDs  
While not a deep, formal diagnostic tool, LEDs located on the chassis and on  
selected system components can serve as front-line indicators of a limited set of  
hardware failures.  
Before You Begin  
You can view LED status by direct inspection of the systems front or back panels.  
Note – Most LEDs available on the front panel are also duplicated on the back  
panel.  
You can also view LED status remotely using RSC and Sun Management Center  
software, if you set up these tools ahead of time. For details on setting up RSC and  
Sun Management Center software, see:  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
Sun Management Center Software Users Guide  
172 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
What to Do  
1. Check the system LEDs.  
There is a group of three LEDs located near the top left corner of the front panel and  
duplicated on the back panel. Their status can tell you the following.  
LED  
Indicates  
Action  
Locator (left)  
A system administrator can  
turn this on to flag a system  
that needs attention.  
Identify the system.  
Fault (middle)  
If lit, hardware or software has Check other LEDs or run  
detected a problem with the  
system.  
diagnostics to determine the  
problem source.  
Power/ OK (right)  
If off, power is not reaching  
the system from the power  
supplies.  
Check AC power source and  
check the power supplies.  
The Locator and Fault LEDs are powered by the systems 5-volt standby power  
source and remain lit for any fault condition that results in a system shutdown.  
2. Check the power supply LEDs.  
Each power supply has a set of four LEDs located on the front panel and duplicated  
on the back panel. Their status can tell you the following.  
LED  
Indicates  
Action  
OK-to-Remove (top)  
If lit, power supply can safely  
be removed.  
Remove power supply as  
needed.  
Fault (2nd from top)  
If lit, there is a problem with  
the power supply or one of its  
internal fans.  
Replace the power supply.  
DC Present (3rd from  
top)  
If off, inadequate DC power is Remove and reseat the power  
being produced by the supply. supply. If this does not help,  
replace the supply.  
AC Present (bottom)  
If off, AC power is not  
reaching the supply.  
Check power cord and the  
outlet to which it connects.  
3. Check the fan tray LEDs.  
There are two LEDs located behind the media door, just under the system control  
switch. One LED on the left is for Fan Tray 0 (CPU) and one LED on the right is for  
Fan Tray 1 (PCI). If either is lit, it indicates that the corresponding fan tray needs  
reseating or replacement.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
                 
4. Check the disk drive LEDs.  
There are two sets of three LEDs, one for each disk drive. These are located behind  
the media door, just to the left of each disk drive. Their status can tell you the  
following.  
LED  
Indicates  
Action  
OK-to-Remove (top)  
If lit, disk can safely be  
removed.  
Remove disk as needed.  
Fault (middle)  
If lit, there is a problem with  
the disk.  
Perform software commands  
to take the disk offline. See the  
Sun Fire V490 Server Parts  
Installation and Removal Guide.  
Activity (bottom)  
If lit or blinking, disk is  
operating normally.  
Not applicable.  
5. (Optional) Check the Ethernet LEDs.  
There are two LEDs for each Ethernet port—they are close to the right side of each  
Ethernet receptacle on the back panel. If the Sun Fire V490 system is connected to an  
Ethernet network, the status of the Ethernet LEDs can tell you the following.  
LED  
Indicates  
Action  
Activity (top, amber)  
If lit or blinking, data is either  
None. The condition of these  
being transmitted or received. LEDs can help you narrow  
down the source of a network  
Link Up (bottom, green)  
If lit, a link is established with  
problem.  
a link partner.  
What Next  
If LEDs do not disclose the source of a suspected problem, try running power-on  
self-tests (POST). See:  
“How to Isolate Faults Using POST Diagnostics” on page 175  
174 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
How to Isolate Faults Using POST  
Diagnostics  
This section explains how to run power-on self-test (POST) diagnostics to isolate  
faults in a Sun Fire V490 server. For background information about POST  
diagnostics and the boot process, see Chapter 6.  
Before You Begin  
You must ensure that the system is configured to run diagnostic tests. See:  
“Controlling POST Diagnostics” on page 82  
You must additionally decide whether you want to view POST diagnostic output  
locally, via a terminal or tipconnection to the machines serial port, or remotely  
after redirecting system console output to the system controller (SC).  
Note – A server can have only one system console at a time, so if you redirect  
output to the system controller, no information appears at the serial port (ttya).  
1. Set up a console for viewing POST messages.  
Connect an alphanumeric terminal to the Sun Fire V490 server or establish a tip  
connection to another Sun system. See:  
“How to Set Up an Alphanumeric Terminal as the System Console” on page 133  
“How to Access the System Console via tipConnection” on page 129  
2. (Optional) Redirect console output to the system controller, if desired.  
For instructions, see “How to Redirect the System Console to the System Controller”  
on page 159.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
   
3. Start POST diagnostics. Type:  
ok post  
The system runs the POST diagnostics and displays status and error messages via  
either the local serial terminal (ttya) or the redirected (system controller) system  
console.  
4. Examine the POST output.  
Each POST error message includes a “best guess” as to which field-replaceable unit  
(FRU) was the source of failure. In some cases, there may be more than one possible  
source, and these are listed in order of decreasing likelihood.  
Note – Should the POST output contain code names and acronyms with which you  
are unfamiliar, see TABLE 6-13 in “Reference for Terms in Diagnostic Output” on  
page 114.  
What Next  
Have a qualified service technician replace the FRU or FRUs indicated by POST  
error messages, if any. For replacement instructions, see:  
Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide, which is included on the  
Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD  
If the POST diagnostics did not disclose any problems, but your system does not  
start, try running the interactive OpenBoot Diagnostics tests.  
176 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Isolate Faults Using Interactive  
OpenBoot Diagnostics Tests  
Before You Begin  
Because OpenBoot Diagnostics tests require access to some of the same hardware  
operating system halt or Stop-A key sequence. You need to reset the system before  
running OpenBoot Diagnostics tests, and then reset the system again after testing.  
Instructions for doing this follow.  
This procedure assumes you have established a system console. See:  
“About Communicating With the System” on page 69  
1. Halt the server to reach the okprompt.  
How you do this depends on the systems condition. If possible, you should warn  
users and shut down the system gracefully. For information, see “About the ok  
Prompt” on page 49.  
2. Set the auto-boot?diagnostic configuration variable to false. Type:  
ok setenv auto-boot? false  
3. Reset or power cycle the system.  
4. Invoke the OpenBoot Diagnostics tests. Type:  
ok obdiag  
The obdiagprompt and test menu appear. The menu is shown in FIGURE 6-4.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
   
5. Type the appropriate command and numbers for the tests you want to run.  
For example, to run all available OpenBoot Diagnostics tests, type:  
obdiag> test-all  
To run a particular test, type:  
where #represents the number of the desired test.  
For a list of OpenBoot Diagnostics test commands, see “Interactive OpenBoot  
Diagnostics Commands” on page 87. The numbered menu of tests is shown in  
FIGURE 6-4.  
6. When you are done running OpenBoot Diagnostics tests, exit the test menu. Type:  
obdiag> exit  
The okprompt reappears.  
7. Set the auto-boot?diagnostic configuration variable back to true. Type:  
ok setenv auto-boot? true  
This allows the operating system to resume starting up automatically after future  
system resets or power cycles.  
What Next  
Have a qualified service technician replace the FRU or FRUs indicated by OpenBoot  
Diagnostics error messages, if any. For replacement instructions, see:  
Sun Fire V490 Server Parts Installation and Removal Guide  
This document is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
178 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to View Diagnostic Test  
Results After the Fact  
Summaries of the results from the most recent power-on self-test (POST) and  
OpenBoot Diagnostics tests are saved across power cycles.  
You must set up a system console. See:  
“About Communicating With the System” on page 69  
Then halt the server to reach the okprompt. See:  
“About the okPrompt” on page 49  
What to Do  
To see a summary of the most recent POST results, type:  
ok show-post-results  
To see a summary of the most recent OpenBoot Diagnostics test results, type:  
ok show-obdiag-results  
What Next  
You should see a system-dependent list of hardware components, along with an  
indication of which components passed and which failed POST or OpenBoot  
Diagnostics tests.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to View and Set OpenBoot  
Configuration Variables  
Switches and diagnostic configuration variables stored by the system firmware  
determine how and when power-on self-test (POST) diagnostics and OpenBoot  
Diagnostics tests are performed. This section explains how to access and modify  
OpenBoot configuration variables. For a list of important OpenBoot configuration  
variables, see TABLE 6-2.  
Before You Begin  
Halt the server to reach the okprompt. See:  
“About the okPrompt” on page 49  
What to Do  
To display the current values of all OpenBoot configuration variables, use the  
printenvcommand.  
The following example shows a short excerpt of this commands output.  
ok printenv  
Variable Name  
Value  
Default Value  
diag-level  
min  
max  
diag-switch?  
false  
false  
To set or change the value of an OpenBoot configuration variable, use the setenv  
command:  
ok setenv diag-level max  
diag-level = max  
180 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To set OpenBoot configuration variables that accept multiple keywords, separate  
keywords with a space:  
Note – The test-argsvariable operates differently from other OpenBoot  
configuration variables. It requires a single argument consisting of a comma-  
separated list of keywords. For details, see “Controlling OpenBoot Diagnostics  
Tests” on page 85.  
What Next  
Changes to OpenBoot configuration variables usually take effect upon the next  
reboot.  
Reference for Choosing a Fault Isolation  
Tool  
This section helps you choose the right tool to isolate a failed part in a Sun Fire V490  
system. Consider the following questions when selecting a tool.  
1. Have you checked the LEDs?  
Certain system components have built-in LEDs that can alert you when that  
component requires replacement. For detailed instructions, see “How to Isolate  
Faults Using LEDs” on page 172.  
2. Does the system have main power?  
If there is no main power to the system, standby power from the SC card may  
enable you to check the status of some components. See “About Monitoring the  
System” on page 101.  
3. Does the system boot?  
If the system cannot boot, you have to run firmware-based diagnostics that do not  
depend on the operating system.  
If the system can boot, you should use a more comprehensive tool. The typical  
fault isolation process is illustrated in FIGURE 10-1.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
 
Fault  
LED lit  
?
yes  
no  
Replace part  
System  
boots  
?
yes  
no  
Consider running  
system exerciser  
Run POST  
yes  
no  
POST  
failure  
?
Replace part  
Run OBDiag  
OBDiag  
failure  
?
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
Disk  
failure  
?
Software or  
disk problem  
Software  
problem  
Check disks  
FIGURE 10-1 Choosing a Tool to Isolate Hardware Faults  
4. Do you intend to run the tests remotely?  
Both Sun Management Center and RSC software enable you to run tests from a  
remote computer. In addition, RSC software provides a means of redirecting  
system console output, allowing you remotely to view and run tests—like POST  
diagnostics—that usually require physical proximity to the serial port on the  
systems back panel.  
182 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Will the tool test the suspected source(s) of the problem?  
Perhaps you already have some idea of what the problem is. If so, you want to  
use a diagnostic tool capable of testing the suspected problem sources.  
TABLE 6-5 tells you which replaceable hardware parts can be isolated by each  
fault isolating tool.  
system exercising tool.  
6. Is the problem intermittent or software-related?  
If a problem is not caused by a clearly defective hardware component, then you  
may want to use a system exerciser tool rather than a fault isolation tool. See  
Chapter 12 for instructions and “About Exercising the System” on page 105 for  
background information.  
Chapter 10 Isolating Failed Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
184 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
11  
Monitoring the System  
When something goes wrong with the system, diagnostic tools can help you  
determine what caused the problem. Indeed, this is the principal use of most  
diagnostic tools. However, this approach is inherently reactive. It means waiting  
until a component fails outright.  
Some diagnostic tools allow you to be more proactive by monitoring the system  
while it is still “healthy.” Monitoring tools give administrators early warning of  
imminent failure, thereby allowing planned maintenance and better system  
availability. Remote monitoring also allows administrators the convenience of  
checking on the status of many machines from one centralized location.  
Sun provides two tools that you can use to monitor servers:  
Sun Management Center software  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) software  
In addition to these tools, Sun provides software-based and firmware-based  
monitoring tool, these commands enable you to review at a glance the status of  
This chapter describes the tasks necessary to use these tools to monitor your Sun  
page 186  
“How to Monitor the System Using the System Controller and RSC Software” on  
page 190  
“How to Use Solaris System Information Commands” on page 197  
“How to Use OpenBoot Information Commands” on page 198  
If you want background information about the tools, turn to Chapter 6.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note – Many of the procedures in this chapter assume that you are familiar with the  
OpenBoot firmware and that you know how to enter the OpenBoot environment.  
For background information, see “About the okPrompt” on page 49. For  
instructions, see “How to Get to the okPrompt” on page 126.  
How to Monitor the System Using Sun  
Sun Management Center software is a flexible product with many features and  
options. How you use it depends on the specifics of your network as well as your  
needs and preferences. You must decide what role or roles you want your Sun Fire  
V490 system to play within the Sun Management Center domain. See “How Sun  
Management Center Works” on page 103 for details.  
Before You Begin  
This procedure assumes you intend to load Sun Management Center agent software  
on your Sun Fire V490 system so as to be able to monitor it, and gives you some  
guidance on how to accomplish this goal.  
This procedure also assumes you have set up or will set up one or more computers  
to function as Sun Management Center servers and consoles. Servers and consoles  
are part of the infrastructure that enables you to monitor systems using Sun  
Management Center software. Typically, you would install the server and console  
software on machines other than the Sun Fire V490 systems you intend to monitor.  
For details, see the Sun Management Center Users Guide.  
If you intend to set up your Sun Fire V490 system as a Sun Management Center  
server or console, see:  
Sun Management Center Installation and Configuration Guide  
Sun Management Center Users Guide  
Also see the other documents accompanying your Sun Management Center  
software.  
186 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note – Sun Management Center software provides both standalone and browser-  
based console interfaces. This procedure assumes you are using the standalone Java  
technology-based console. The web-browser console interface, which differs  
somewhat in design and capabilities, is covered in the Sun Management Center Users  
Guide.  
What to Do  
1. On your Sun Fire V490 system, install Sun Management Center agent software.  
For instructions, see the Sun Management Center Supplement for Workgroup Servers.  
2. On your Sun Fire V490 system, run the setup utility to configure agent software.  
The setup utility is part of the workgroup server supplement. For more information,  
see the Sun Management Center Supplement for Workgroup Servers.  
3. On the Sun Management Center server, add the Sun Fire V490 system to an  
administrative domain.  
You can do this automatically using the Discovery Manager tool, or manually by  
creating an object from the consoles Edit menu. For specific instructions, see the Sun  
Management Center Users Guide.  
4. On a Sun Management Center console, double-click the icon representing the Sun  
Fire V490 system.  
The Details window appears.  
5. Click the Hardware tab.  
Details window  
Hardware tab  
Views pull-down menu  
Physical and logical views  
6. Monitor the Sun Fire V490 system using physical and logical views.  
a. Select “Physical View: system” from the Views pull-down menu.  
The physical view lets you interact with photo-realistic views of the Sun Fire V490  
system as seen from the front, left, rear, and top. As you highlight individual  
hardware components and features, status and manufacturing information about  
each component appears to the right.  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Photo-realistic view (front)  
Highlighted component  
(disk drive)  
Information about  
disk drive  
b. Select “Logical View: system” from the Views pull-down menu.  
The logical view lets you browse a hierarchy of system components, arranged as  
a tree of nested folders.  
Logical view  
V490  
Selected component  
As you highlight a hardware component, status and manufacturing information  
about that component appears in a property table to the right.  
Status information  
about selected  
component  
For more information about physical and logical views, see the Sun Management  
Center Users Guide.  
188 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Monitor the Sun Fire V490 system using Config-Reader module data property  
tables.  
To access this information:  
a. Click the Browser tab.  
b. Click the Hardware icon in the hierarchy view.  
Browser tab  
Hardware icon  
Config-Reader icon  
Data property table icons  
c. Click the Config-Reader icon in the hierarchy view.  
Under the Config-Reader icon you can find data property table icons for many  
hardware components.  
d. Click a data property table icon to see status information for that hardware  
component.  
These tables give you many kinds of device-dependent status information,  
including:  
System temperatures  
Processor clock frequency  
Device model numbers  
Whether a device is field-replaceable  
Condition (pass or fail) of memory banks, fans, and other devices  
Power supply type  
For more information about the Config-Reader module data property tables, see  
the Sun Management Center Users Guide.  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
What Next  
There is much more to Sun Management Center software than what is detailed in  
this manual. In particular, you may be interested in setting alarms and administering  
security. These topics and many others are covered in the Sun Management Center  
Users Guide, as well as the other documents accompanying the Sun Management  
Center software.  
How to Monitor the System Using the  
System Controller and RSC Software  
This section explains how to configure the system controller (SC) card and set up  
Remote System Control (RSC) software. It also steps you through some of the tools  
most important monitoring features.  
Before You Begin  
The Sun Fire V490 server must be set up with RSC server software, which can be  
found on the Solaris Software Supplement CD. Typically, you monitor the Sun Fire  
V490 system from a different Sun computer or a PC. This procedure assumes you  
have installed RSC client software on the monitoring system.  
There are many ways to configure and use the system controller and its RSC  
software, and only you can decide which is right for your organization. This  
procedure is designed to give you an idea of the capabilities of RSC softwares  
graphical user interface (GUI). It assumes you have configured RSC software to use  
the system controller cards Ethernet port, and have made any necessary physical  
connections between the card and the network. It also assumes your network has not  
been set up to use dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) and illustrates the  
use of config IP mode instead. Note that after running SC and RSC through their  
paces, you can change configuration by running the configuration script again.  
To configure the system controller card and RSC software, you need to know your  
networks subnet mask as well as the IP addresses of both the system controller card  
and the gateway system. Have this information available.  
For detailed information about installing and configuring RSC server and client  
software, see:  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
190 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
What to Do  
1. As root on the Sun Fire V490 server, run the RSC configuration script. Type:  
# /usr/platform/‘uname -i‘/rsc/rsc-config  
The configuration script runs, prompting you to choose options and to provide  
information.  
2. Follow the configuration script prompts.  
For the purposes of this procedure, you can accept most of the default values.  
However, you need to pay attention to specific prompts as described below.  
a. Choose to enable the RSC Ethernet interface, using configIP mode:  
Enable RSC Ethernet Interface (y|n|s|?) [n]: y  
RSC IP Mode (config|dhcp|?) [dhcp]: config  
b. When configuring Ethernet, provide the IP address of the RSC device:  
RSC IP Address []: 192.168.111.222  
c. Also provide your networks subnet mask:  
RSC IP Netmask [255.255.255.0]: 255.255.255.0  
d. Provide the IP address of the gateway machine:  
RSC IP Gateway []: 192.168.111.123  
e. Set up an RSC account, supplying a user name and permissions:  
Setup RSC User Account (y|n|?) [y]: y  
Username []: jefferson  
User Permissions (c,u,a,r|none|?) [cuar]: cuar  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
f. Near the end of the script, you need to provide an RSC password:  
Setting User Password Now ...  
Password:  
Re-enter Password:  
The RSC firmware on the Sun Fire V490 system is configured. Perform the following  
steps on the monitoring system.  
3. From the monitoring Sun computer or PC, start the RSC GUI.  
Do one of the following.  
If you are accessing the RSC GUI from a Sun computer, type:  
# /opt/rsc/bin/rsc  
If you are accessing the RSC GUI from a PC, do one of the following:  
Double-click the Sun Remote System Controller desktop icon (if installed).  
From the Start menu, choose Programs and then Sun Remote System  
Controller  
(if installed).  
Double-click the RSC icon in the folder where RSC was installed. The default  
path is:  
C:\Program Files\Sun Microsystems\Remote System Control  
A login screen appears prompting you to enter the IP address (or hostname) of the  
RSC card, as well as the RSC user name and password that you set up during the  
configuration process.  
192 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Reply to the prompts given at the login screen.  
The main screen of the GUI appears.  
5. Note the main screens features.  
The left side of the main screen provides help text and navigation controls. The right  
side shows a representation of the Sun Fire V490 servers front panel and system  
control switch.  
Disk drive LEDs  
Power button  
Fan Tray LEDs  
Locator LED  
Navigation and  
help panels  
Interactive front  
panel representation  
This front panel representation is dynamic—you can watch from a remote console  
and see when the Sun Fire V490 servers switch settings or LED status changes.  
6. Interact with the front panel representation to initiate actions.  
The front panel representation is interactive. You click various parts of it to initiate  
actions. Try any or all of the following:  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
     
a. Turn the Sun Fire V490 servers power off (or on).  
Click the Power button on the front panel representation. A dialog box appears  
asking you to confirm the action. Proceeding will actually turn system power off  
(or on).  
Power button  
b. Examine status tables for the Sun Fire V490 servers disks and fans.  
Click the appropriate LEDs. A table appears giving you the status of the  
components in question.  
Fan tray LEDs  
Fan tray status table  
c. Turn the Sun Fire V490 servers Locator LED on and off.  
Click the representation of the Locator LED (see the illustration under Step 5). Its  
state will toggle from off to on and back again each time you click, mimicking the  
condition of the physical Locator LED on the machines front panel.  
194 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Check system temperatures and other environmental data.  
To do this:  
a. Find the navigation panel at the left side of the RSC GUI.  
b. Click the Show Environmental Status item under Server Status and Control.  
The Environmental Status window appears.  
Check marks  
By default, the Temperatures tab is selected and temperature data from specific  
chassis locations are graphed. The green check marks on each tab let you see at a  
glance that no problems are found with these subsystems.  
If a problem does occur, RSC brings it to your attention by displaying a failure or  
warning symbol over each affected graph, and more prominently, in each affected  
tab.  
Warning symbols  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
 
c. Click the other Environmental Status window tabs to see additional data.  
8. Access the Sun Fire V490 servers system console from RSC software.  
To do this:  
a. Find the navigation panel at the left side of the RSC GUI.  
b. Click the Open Console item under Server Status and Control.  
A Console window appears.  
c. From the Console window, press the Return key to reach the system console  
output.  
Open Console icon  
System Console window  
Note – If you have not set OpenBoot configuration variables properly, no console  
output will appear. For instructions, see “How to Redirect the System Console to the  
System Controller” on page 159.  
What Next  
If you plan to use RSC software to control the Sun Fire V490 server, you may want to  
configure additional RSC user accounts.  
If you want to try the system controller command-line interface, you can use the  
telnetcommand to connect directly to the RSC card using the devices name or IP  
address. When the rsc>prompt appears, type helpto get a list of available  
commands.  
196 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you want to change RSC configuration, run the configuration script again as  
shown in Step 1 of this procedure.  
For information about RSC configuration, user accounts, and alerts, see:  
Sun Remote System Controller (RSC) Users Guide  
This document is included on the Sun Fire V490 Documentation CD.  
Commands  
This section explains how to run Solaris system information commands on a Sun  
Fire V490 server. To find out what these commands tell you, see “Solaris System  
Information Commands” on page 93, or see the appropriate man pages.  
Before You Begin  
The operating system must be up and running.  
What to Do  
1. Decide what kind of system information you want to display.  
For more information, see “Solaris System Information Commands” on page 93.  
2. Type the appropriate command at a console prompt. See TABLE 11-1.  
TABLE 11-1 Using Solaris Information Display Commands  
Command  
What It Displays  
What to Type  
Notes  
prtconf  
System configuration  
information  
/usr/sbin/prtconf  
prtdiag  
Diagnostic and configuration  
information  
/usr/platform/sun4u/sb  
in/prtdiag  
Use the -voption for  
additional detail.  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
     
TABLE 11-1 Using Solaris Information Display Commands (Continued)  
Command  
What It Displays  
What to Type  
Notes  
prtfru  
FRU hierarchy and SEEPROM  
memory contents  
/usr/sbin/prtfru  
Use the -loption to display  
hierarchy. Use the -coption  
to display SEEPROM data.  
psrinfo  
showrev  
Date and time each processor  
came online; processor clock  
speed  
/usr/sbin/psrinfo  
Use the -voption to obtain  
clock speed and other data.  
Hardware and software revision /usr/bin/showrev  
Use the -poption to show  
information  
software patches.  
Commands  
This section explains how to run OpenBoot commands that display different kinds  
of system information about a Sun Fire V490 server. To find out what these  
commands tell you, see “Other OpenBoot Commands” on page 90, or refer to the  
appropriate man pages.  
Before You Begin  
As long as you can reach the okprompt, you can use OpenBoot information  
commands. This means the commands are usually accessible even if your system  
cannot boot its operating system software.  
1. If necessary, halt the system to reach the okprompt.  
How you do this depends on the systems condition. If possible, you should warn  
users and shut down the system gracefully. For information, see “About the ok  
Prompt” on page 49.  
2. Decide what kind of system information you want to display.  
For more information, see “Other OpenBoot Commands” on page 90.  
198 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Type the appropriate command at a console prompt. See TABLE 11-2.  
TABLE 11-2 Using OpenBoot Information Commands  
Command to Type  
.env  
What It Displays  
Fan speeds, currents, voltages, and temperatures  
OpenBoot configuration variable defaults and settings  
printenv  
probe-scsi  
probe-scsi-all  
probe-ide  
Target address, unit number, device type, and manufacturer name  
of active SCSI, IDE, and FC-AL devices  
Note: These probe commands can hang the system if executed  
while Solaris OS is running (that is, after issuing a Stop-A  
command)  
show-devs  
Hardware device paths of all devices in the system configuration  
Chapter 11 Monitoring the System  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
200 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER  
12  
Exercising the System  
Sometimes a server exhibits a problem that cannot be isolated definitively to a  
particular hardware or software component. In such cases, it may be useful to run a  
diagnostic utility that stresses the system by continuously running a comprehensive  
battery of tests. Sun provides two such utilities that you can use with the Sun Fire  
V490 server:  
SunVTS (Sun Validation Test Suite)  
Hardware Diagnostic Suite  
be found in the Sun Management Center Software Users Guide.  
This chapter describes the tasks necessary to use SunVTS software to exercise your  
Sun Fire V490 server. These include:  
“How to Exercise the System Using SunVTS Software” on page 202  
“How to Check Whether SunVTS Software Is Installed” on page 206  
If you want background information about the tools and when to use them, turn to  
Chapter 6.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How to Exercise the System Using  
SunVTS Software  
Before You Begin  
The Solaris operating system must be running. You also need to make sure that  
“How to Check Whether SunVTS Software Is Installed” on page 206  
SunVTS software requires that you use one of two security schemes, and these must  
be properly configured in order for you to perform this procedure. For details, see:  
SunVTS Users Guide  
“SunVTS Software and Security” on page 108  
SunVTS software features both character-based and graphics-based interfaces. This  
procedure assumes that you are using the graphical user interface (GUI) on a system  
character-based SunVTS TTY interface, and specifically for instructions on accessing  
it by tipor telnetcommands, see the SunVTS Users Guide.  
SunVTS software can be run in several modes. This procedure assumes that you are  
using the default Functional mode. For a synopsis of the modes, see:  
“Exercising the System Using SunVTS Software” on page 106  
This procedure also assumes that the Sun Fire V490 server is “headless”—that is, it is  
not equipped with a monitor capable of displaying bitmapped graphics. In this case,  
you access the SunVTS GUI by logging in remotely from a machine that has a  
graphics display.  
Finally, this procedure describes how to run SunVTS tests in general. Individual tests  
may presume the presence of specific hardware, or may require specific drivers,  
cables, or loopback connectors. For information about test options and prerequisites,  
see:  
SunVTS Test Reference Manual  
SunVTS Documentation Supplement  
202 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
What to Do  
1. Log in as superuser to a system with a graphics display.  
The display system should be one with a frame buffer and monitor capable of  
displaying bitmapped graphics such as those produced by the SunVTS GUI.  
2. Enable remote display. On the display system, type:  
# /usr/openwin/bin/xhost + test-system  
where test-system is the name of the Sun Fire V490 server being tested.  
3. Remotely log in to the Sun Fire V490 server as superuser.  
Use a command such as rloginor telnet.  
4. Start SunVTS software. Type:  
# /opt/SUNWvts/bin/sunvts -display display-system:0  
where display-system is the name of the machine through which you are remotely  
logged in to the Sun Fire V490 server.  
If you have installed SunVTS software in a location other than the default /opt  
directory, alter the path in the above command accordingly.  
The SunVTS GUI appears on the display systems screen.  
Chapter 12 Exercising the System  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Log button  
Start and Stop buttons  
Test selection area  
Mode selection area  
Test messages area  
5. Expand the test lists to see the individual tests.  
The interfaces test selection area lists tests in categories, such as “Network,” as  
+
shown below. To expand a category, click the  
icon to the left of the category name.  
204 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. (Optional) Select the tests you want to run.  
Certain tests are enabled by default, and you can choose to accept these.  
Alternatively, you can enable and disable individual tests or blocks of tests by  
clicking the checkbox next to the test name or test category name. Tests are enabled  
when checked, and disabled when not checked.  
TABLE 12-1 lists tests that are especially useful to run on a Sun Fire V490 server.  
TABLE 12-1 Useful SunVTS Tests to Run on a Sun Fire V490 Server  
SunVTS Tests  
FRUs Exercised by Tests  
cmttest, cputest, fputest, iutest,  
l1dcachetest  
CPU/ Memory board, centerplane  
indirectly: l2cachetest, l2sramtest,  
mpconstest, mptest, systest  
vmemtest, pmemtest, ramtest  
Memory modules, CPU/ Memory board,  
centerplane  
disktest, qlctest  
nettest, netlbtest  
env5test, i2ctest  
sptest  
Disks, cables, FC-AL backplane  
Network interface, network cable, centerplane  
Power supplies, fan tray, LEDs, centerplane  
Centerplane  
ssptest  
SC card  
usbkbtest, disktest  
dvdtest, cdtest  
USB devices, centerplane  
DVD device  
Note – TABLE 12-1 lists FRUs in order of the likelihood they caused the test to fail.  
7. (Optional) Customize individual tests.  
You can customize individual tests by right-clicking on the name of the test. For  
instance, in the illustration under Step 5, right-clicking on the text string  
ce0(nettest)brings up a menu that lets you configure this Ethernet test.  
Chapter 12 Exercising the System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
 
8. Start testing.  
Click the Start button, located at the top left of the SunVTS window, to begin  
running the tests you enabled. Status and error messages appear in the Test  
Messages area located across the bottom of the window. You can stop testing at any  
time by clicking the Stop button.  
What Next  
During testing, SunVTS software logs all status and error messages. To view these,  
click the Log button or select Log Files from the Reports menu. This opens a log  
window from which you can choose to view the following logs:  
Information – Detailed versions of all the status and error messages that appear in  
the Test Messages area.  
Test Error – Detailed error messages from individual tests.  
VTS Kernel Error – Error messages pertaining to SunVTS software itself. You  
should look here if SunVTS software appears to be acting strangely, especially  
when it starts up.  
UNIX Messages (/var/adm/messages) – A file containing messages generated  
by the operating system and various applications.  
For further information, see the documentation that accompanies SunVTS software.  
How to Check Whether SunVTS  
Software Is Installed  
Before You Begin  
SunVTS software consists of optional packages that may or may not have been  
loaded when your system software was installed.  
In addition to the SunVTS packages themselves, SunVTS software starting with  
version 5.1 requires certain XML and run-time library packages that may not be  
installed by default on Solaris 8 software.  
This procedure assume that the Solaris operating system is running on the Sun Fire  
V490 server, and that you have access to the Solaris command line. For more  
information, see:  
206 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
“About Communicating With the System” on page 69  
What to Do  
1. Check for the presence of SunVTS packages. Type:  
% pkginfo -l SUNWvts SUNWvtsx SUNWvtsmn  
If SunVTS software is loaded, information about the packages is displayed.  
If SunVTS software is not loaded, you see an error message for each missing  
package.  
ERROR: information for "SUNWvts" was not found  
ERROR: information for "SUNWvtsx" was not found  
...  
The pertinent packages are as follows.  
Package  
Description  
SUNWvts  
SUNWvtsx  
SUNWvtsmn  
SunVTS kernel, user interface, and 32-bit binary tests  
SunVTS 64-bit binary tests and kernel  
SunVTS man pages  
2. (Solaris 8 only) Check for additional needed software.  
This applies only if you intend to install and run SunVTS 5.1 software (or later  
compatible versions) under the Solaris 8 operating system.  
Chapter 12 Exercising the System  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SunVTS 5.1 software requires additional packages that may not be installed with  
Solaris 8 software. To find out, type the following:  
% pkginfo -l SUNWlxml SUNWlxmlx SUNWzlib SUNWzlibx  
This tests for the presence of the following packages.  
Package  
Description  
Notes  
SUNXlxml  
SUNWlxmlx  
SUNWzlib  
SUNWzlibx  
XML library (32-bit)  
Required by SunVTS 5.1  
XML library (64-bit)  
Zip compression library (32-bit)  
Zip compression library (64-bit)  
Needed by XML libraries  
3. If necessary, load any missing packages.  
Use the pkgaddutility to load onto your system any SunVTS and support packages  
that you determined you needed in Step 1 or Step 2.  
For the Solaris 8 operating system, the SunVTS and XML packages are included on  
the Software Supplement CD. The zlibpackages are included on the Solaris  
primary installation CD in the Entire Solaris Software Group.  
Note that /opt/SUNWvtsis the default directory for installing SunVTS software.  
4. Load SunVTS patches, if appropriate.  
Patches to SunVTS software are available periodically on the SunSolveSM Web site.  
These patches provide enhancements and bug fixes. In some cases, there are tests  
that will not run properly unless the patches are installed.  
What Next  
For installation information, refer to the SunVTS Users Guide, the appropriate Solaris  
documentation, and the pkgaddman page.  
208 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
APPENDIX  
A
Connector Pinouts  
“USB Connector” on page 211  
Twisted-Pair Ethernet Connector” on page 212  
“SC Ethernet Connector” on page 213  
“SC Serial Connector” on page 214  
“SC Serial Connector” on page 214  
“FC-AL Port HSSDC Connector” on page 215  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Connector  
The serial port connector is an RJ-45 connector that can be accessed from the back  
panel.  
Serial Port Connector Diagram  
8
1
Serial Port Connector Signals  
Pin  
1
Signal Description  
Request To Send  
Data Terminal Ready  
Transmit Data  
Ground  
Pin  
5
Signal Description  
Ground  
2
6
Receive Data  
Data Set Ready  
Clear To Send  
3
7
4
8
210 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
USB Connector  
Two Universal Serial Bus (USB) connectors are located on the centerplane and can be  
accessed from the back panel.  
USB Connector Diagram  
USB Connector Signals  
Pin  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
Signal Description  
+5 VDC  
Pin  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
Signal Description  
+5 VDC  
Port Data0 -  
Port Data0 +  
Ground  
Port Data1 -  
Port Data1 +  
Ground  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connector Pinouts  
211  
     
Twisted-Pair Ethernet Connector  
The twisted-pair Ethernet (TPE) connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the  
system centerplane and can be accessed from the back panel. The Ethernet interface  
operates at 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps.  
TPE Connector Diagram  
1
8
TPE Connector Signals  
Pin  
1
Signal Description  
Pin  
5
Signal Description  
Transmit/ Receive Data0 +  
Transmit/ Receive Data0 –  
Transmit/ Receive Data1 +  
Transmit/ Receive Data2 +  
Transmit/ Receive Data2 –  
Transmit/ Receive Data1 –  
Transmit/ Receive Data3 +  
Transmit/ Receive Data3 –  
2
6
3
7
4
8
212 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SC Ethernet Connector  
The System Controller (SC) Ethernet connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the  
SC card and can be accessed from the back panel.  
SC Ethernet Connector Diagram  
1
8
SC Ethernet Connector Signals  
Pin  
1
Signal Description  
Pin  
5
Signal Description  
Transmit/ Receive Data0 +  
Transmit/ Receive Data0 -  
Trandmit/ Receive Data1 +  
Trandmit/ Receive Data2 +  
Trandmit/ Receive Data2 -  
Trandmit/ Receive Data1 -  
Trandmit/ Receive Data3 +  
Trandmit/ Receive Data3 -  
2
6
3
7
4
8
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connector Pinouts  
213  
     
SC Serial Connector  
The System Controller (SC) serial connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the SC  
card and can be accessed from the back panel.  
SC Serial Connector Diagram  
1
SERIAL  
8
SC Serial Connector Signals  
Pin  
1
Signal Description  
Request To Send  
Data Terminal Ready  
Transmit Data  
Ground  
Pin  
5
Signal Description  
Ground  
2
6
Receive Data  
Data Set Ready  
Clear To Send  
3
7
4
8
214 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FC-AL Port HSSDC Connector  
The Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop port high-speed serial data connector is located  
on the centerplane and can be accessed from the back panel.  
HSSDC Connector Diagram  
8
1
HSSDC Connector Signal  
Pin  
Signal Description  
Pin  
Signal Description  
1
Differential Data Output +  
5
Optical Output Disable  
(optional)  
2
3
4
Signal Ground (optional)  
Differential Data Output -  
6
7
8
Differential Data Input -  
5V Power (+/ -10%) (optional)  
Differential Data Input +  
Mode Fault Detection  
(optional)  
Appendix A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connector Pinouts  
215  
     
216 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
B
System Specifications  
server:  
“Physical Specifications” on page 217  
“Electrical Specifications” on page 218  
“Environmental Specifications” on page 219  
“Agency Compliance Specifications” on page 220  
“Clearance and Service Access Specifications” on page 220  
Physical Specifications  
The dimensions and weight of the system are as follows.  
Measurement  
U.S  
Metric  
Height  
8.75 in  
17.5 in  
24 in  
222 mm  
446 mm  
610 mm  
Width  
Depth  
Weight  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Power Cord  
79 lbs  
97 lbs  
8.2 ft  
35.83 kg  
44 kg  
2.5 m  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Electrical Specifications  
The following table provides the electrical specifications for the system.  
Note – All electrical specifications apply to a fully configured system.  
Parameter  
Value  
Input  
Nominal Frequencies  
50 or 60 Hz  
Nominal Voltage Range  
Auto Ranging 200-240 VAC  
8A @ 200-240 VAC  
1600 W  
Maximum Current AC RMS  
Maximum AC Power Consumption  
Maximum Heat Dissipation  
5459 BTU/ hr  
218 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Environmental Specifications  
The operating and non-operating environmental specifications for the system are  
as follows.  
Parameter  
Value  
Operating  
Temperature  
5˚ C to 35˚C (41˚F to 95˚F)—IEC 60068-2-1&2  
Humidity  
20% to 80% RH noncondensing; 27˚C (81˚F) wet bulb—  
IEC 60068-2-3&56  
Altitude  
0 to 3000 meters (0 to 10,000 feet)—IEC 60068-2-13  
Vibration  
.0001 (z-axis only) G2/ Hz, 5-150 Hz, -12db/ octave slope,  
150-500 Hz— IEC 60068-2-13  
Shock  
3g peak, 11 milliseconds half-sine pulse—IEC 60068-2-27  
72 DbA  
Declared Acoustics  
Non-Operating  
Temperature  
Humidity  
-20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F)—IEC 60068-2-1&2  
95% RH noncondensing—IEC 60068-2-3&56  
0 to 12,000 meters (0 to 40,000 feet)—IEC 60068-2-13  
Altitude  
Vibration  
.001 (z-axis only) G2/ Hz, 5-150 Hz, -12db/ octave slope,  
150-500 Hz— IEC 60068-2-13  
Shock  
10g peak, 11 milliseconds half-sine pulse—IEC 60068-2-27  
Handling Drops  
Threshold Impact  
25 mm (10 in)  
1 meter/ second  
Appendix B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Specifications  
219  
   
Agency Compliance Specifications  
The system complies with the following specifications.  
Category  
Relevant Standards  
Safety  
UL 60950, CB Scheme IEC 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950-00 from UL,  
TUV EN 60950  
47 CFR 15B Class A  
EN55022 Class A  
VCCI Class A  
ICES-003  
RFI/ EMI  
AS/ NZ 3548  
CNS 13438  
Immunity  
EN55024  
IEC 61000-4-2  
IEC 61000-4-3  
IEC 61000-4-4  
IEC 61000-4-5  
IEC 61000-4-6  
IEC 61000-4-8  
IEC 61000-4-11  
Clearance and Service Access  
Specifications  
Minimum clearances needed for servicing the system are as follows.  
Blockage  
Required Clearance  
Front blockage only  
Rear blockage only  
Front and rear blockage  
Front clearance  
36 in (92 cm)  
36 in (92 cm)  
36 in (92 cm)  
36 in (92 cm)  
36 in (92 cm)  
Rear clearance  
220 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
APPENDIX  
C
Safety Precautions  
Read this section before beginning any procedure. The following text provides safety precautions to follow when  
installing a Sun Microsystems product.  
Safety Precautions  
For your protection, observe the following safety precautions when setting up your equipment:  
Follow all cautions and instructions marked on the equipment.  
Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source match the voltage and frequency inscribed on the  
equipments electrical rating label.  
Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment. Dangerous voltages may be present.  
Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuit that could cause fire, electric shock, or damage to  
your equipment.  
Symbols  
The following symbols may appear in this book and/ or on the product:  
Caution – There is risk of personal injury and  
equipment damage. Follow the instructions.  
Caution Hot surface. Avoid contact. Surfaces  
are hot and may cause personal injury if  
touched.  
Caution Hazardous voltages are present. To  
reduce the risk of electric shock and danger to  
personal health, follow the instructions.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Depending on the type of power switch your device has, one of the following symbols may be used:  
On – Applies AC power to the system.  
Off - Removes AC power from the system.  
Standby – The On/ Standby switch is in the  
standby position.  
Modifications to Equipment  
Do not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the equipment. Sun Microsystems is not responsible for  
regulatory compliance of a modified Sun product.  
Placement of a Sun Product  
Caution – Do not block or cover the openings  
of your Sun product. Never place a Sun  
product near a radiator or heat register.  
Failure to follow these guidelines can cause  
overheating and affect the reliability of your  
Sun product.  
Caution – The workplace-dependent noise  
level defined in DIN 45 635 Part 1000 must be  
70Db(A) or less.  
SELV Compliance  
Safety status of I/ O connections comply to SELV requirements.  
222 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Cord Connection  
Caution – Sun products are designed to work  
with single-phase power systems having a  
grounded neutral conductor. To reduce the  
risk of electric shock, do not plug Sun  
products into any other type of power system.  
Contact your facilities manager or a qualified  
electrician if you are not sure what type of  
power is supplied to your building.  
Caution Not all power cords have the same  
current ratings. Household extension cords do  
not have overload protection and are not  
meant for use with computer systems. Do not  
use household extension cords with your Sun  
product.  
Caution Your Sun product is shipped with a  
grounding type (three-wire) power cord. To  
reduce the risk of electric shock, always plug  
the cord into a grounded power outlet.  
Caution – In order to remove all power from  
the system, disconnect all power cords.  
Appendix C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
223  
The following caution applies only to devices with a Standby power switch:  
Caution – The power switch of this product  
functions as a standby type device only. The  
power cord serves as the primary disconnect  
device for the system. Be sure to plug the  
power cord into a grounded power outlet that  
is nearby the system and is readily accessible.  
Do not connect the power cord when the  
power supply has been removed from the  
system chassis.  
Lithium Battery  
Caution – The Sun Fire V490 Server system  
PCI riser board and SC card contain lithium  
batteries. Batteries are not customer  
replaceable parts. They may explode if  
mishandled. Do not dispose of the battery in  
fire. Do not disassemble it or attempt to  
recharge it.  
System Unit Access Panels  
You must remove the access panels of your Sun Fire V490 Server to add cards or memory. Be sure to replace and  
secure the access panels before powering on your system.  
Caution – Do not operate your system while  
the access panels are removed. Failure to take  
this precaution may result in personal injury  
and system damage.  
224 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Compliance Notice  
Sun products that use laser technology comply with Class 1 laser requirements.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Klasse 1 Laser Apparat  
Laser KLasse 1  
CD-ROM  
Caution – Use of controls, adjustments, or the  
performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
Appendix C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
225  
Einhaltung sicherheitsbehördlicher Vorschriften  
Auf dieser Seite werden Sicherheitsrichtlinien beschrieben, die bei der Installation von Sun-Produkten zu beachten  
sind.  
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen  
Treffen Sie zu Ihrem eigenen Schutz die folgenden Sicherheitsvorkehrungen, wenn Sie Ihr Gerät installieren:  
Beachten Sie alle auf den Geräten angebrachten Warnhinweise und Anweisungen.  
Vergewissern Sie sich, daß Spannung und Frequenz Ihrer Stromquelle mit der Spannung und Frequenz  
übereinstimmen, die auf dem Etikett mit den elektrischen Nennwerten des Geräts angegeben sind.  
Stecken Sie auf keinen Fall irgendwelche Gegenstände in Öffnungen in den Geräten. Leitfähige Gegenstände  
könnten aufgrund der möglicherweise vorliegenden gefährlichen Spannungen einen Kurzschluß verursachen,  
der einen Brand, Stromschlag oder Geräteschaden herbeiführen kann.  
Symbole  
Die Symbole in diesem Handbuch haben folgende Bedeutung:  
Achtung – Gefahr von Verletzung und  
Geräteschaden. Befolgen Sie die  
Anweisungen.  
Achtung Hohe Temperatur. Nicht berühren,  
da Verletzungsgefahr durch heiße Oberfläche  
besteht.  
Achtung – Gefährliche Spannungen.  
Anweisungen befolgen, um Stromschläge und  
Verletzungen zu vermeiden.  
Je nach Netzschaltertyp an Ihrem Gerät kann eines der folgenden Symbole benutzt werden:  
Ein – Setzt das System unter Wechselstrom.  
Aus – Unterbricht die Wechselstromzufuhr  
zum Gerät.  
Wartezustand (Stand-by-Position) - Der Ein-  
/ Wartezustand-Schalter steht auf  
Wartezustand. Änderungen an Sun-Geräten.  
Nehmen Sie keine mechanischen oder elektrischen Änderungen an den Geräten vor. Sun Microsystems, übernimmt  
bei einem Sun-Produkt, das geändert wurde, keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung behördlicher Vorschriften  
226 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aufstellung von Sun-Geräten  
Achtung – Um den zuverlässigen Betrieb  
Ihres Sun-Geräts zu gewährleisten und es vor  
Überhitzung zu schützen, dürfen die  
Öffnungen im Gerät nicht blockiert oder  
verdeckt werden. Sun-Produkte sollten  
niemals in der Nähe von Heizkörpern oder  
Heizluftklappen aufgestellt werden.  
Achtung – Der arbeitsplatzbezogene  
Schalldruckpegel nach DIN 45 635 Teil 1000  
beträgt 70Db(A) oder weniger.  
Einhaltung der SELV-Richtlinien  
Die Sicherung der I/ O-Verbindungen entspricht den Anforderungen der SELV-Spezifikation.  
Anschluß des Netzkabels  
Achtung – Sun-Produkte sind für den Betrieb  
an Einphasen-Stromnetzen mit geerdetem  
Nulleiter vorgesehen. Um die  
Stromschlaggefahr zu reduzieren, schließen  
Sie Sun-Produkte nicht an andere  
Stromquellen an. Ihr Betriebsleiter oder ein  
qualifizierter Elektriker kann Ihnen die Daten  
zur Stromversorgung in Ihrem Gebäude  
geben.  
Achtung Nicht alle Netzkabel haben die  
gleichen Nennwerte. Herkömmliche, im  
Haushalt verwendete Verlängerungskabel  
besitzen keinen Überlastungsschutz und sind  
daher für Computersysteme nicht geeignet.  
Achtung – Ihr Sun-Gerät wird mit einem  
dreiadrigen Netzkabel für geerdete  
Netzsteckdosen geliefert. Um die Gefahr eines  
Stromschlags zu reduzieren, schließen Sie das  
Kabel nur an eine fachgerecht verlegte,  
geerdete Steckdose an.  
Achtung – Bei Produkten mit mehreren  
Kabeln müssen zur vollständigen  
Unterbrechung der Stromversorgung alle  
Kabel abgezogen werden.  
Appendix C  
Safety Precautions  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Die folgende Warnung gilt nur für Geräte mit Wartezustand-Netzschalter:  
Achtung – Der Ein/ Aus-Schalter dieses  
Geräts schaltet nur auf Wartezustand (Stand-  
By-Modus). Um die Stromzufuhr zum Gerät  
vollständig zu unterbrechen, müssen Sie das  
Netzkabel von der Steckdose abziehen.  
Schließen Sie den Stecker des Netzkabels an  
eine in der Nähe befindliche, frei zugängliche,  
geerdete Netzsteckdose an. Schließen Sie das  
Netzkabel nicht an, wenn das Netzteil aus der  
Systemeinheit entfernt wurde.  
Lithiumbatterie  
Achtung – CPU-Karten von Sun verfügen  
über eine Echtzeituhr mit integrierter  
Lithiumbatterie (Teile-Nr. MK48T59Y,  
MK48TXXB-XX, MK48T18-XXXPCZ,  
M48T59W-XXXPCZ, oder MK48T08). Diese  
Batterie darf nur von einem qualifizierten  
Servicetechniker ausgewechselt werden, da sie  
bei falscher Handhabung explodieren kann.  
Werfen Sie die Batterie nicht ins Feuer.  
Versuchen Sie auf keinen Fall, die Batterie  
auszubauen oder wiederaufzuladen.  
Gehäuseabdeckung  
Sie müssen die obere Abdeckung Ihres Sun-Systems entfernen, um interne Komponenten wie Karten, Speicherchips  
oder Massenspeicher hinzuzufügen. Bringen Sie die obere Gehäuseabdeckung wieder an, bevor Sie Ihr System  
einschalten.  
Achtung – Bei Betrieb des Systems ohne obere  
Abdeckung besteht die Gefahr von  
Stromschlag und Systemschäden.  
228 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Einhaltung der Richtlinien für Laser  
Sun-Produkte, die mit Laser-Technologie arbeiten, entsprechen den Anforderungen der Laser Klasse 1.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Klasse 1 Laser Apparat  
Laser KLasse 1  
CD-ROM  
Warnung – Die Verwendung von anderen  
Steuerungen und Einstellungen oder die  
Durchfhrung von Prozeduren, die von den  
hier beschriebenen abweichen, knnen  
gefhrliche Strahlungen zur Folge haben.  
Conformité aux normes de sécurité  
Ce texte traite des mesures de sécurité quil convient de prendre pour linstallation dun produit Sun Microsystems.  
Mesures de sécurité  
Pour votre protection, veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes pendant linstallation du matériel :  
Suivre tous les avertissements et toutes les instructions inscrites sur le matériel.  
Vérifier que la tension et la fréquence de la source dalimentation électrique correspondent à la tension et à la  
fréquence indiquées sur létiquette de classification de l’appareil.  
Ne jamais introduire dobjets quels quils soient dans une des ouvertures de lappareil. Vous pourriez vous  
trouver en présence de hautes tensions dangereuses. Tout objet conducteur introduit de la sorte pourrait  
produire un court-circuit qui entraînerait des flammes, des risques délectrocution ou des dégâts matériels.  
Symboles  
Vous trouverez ci-dessous la signification des différents symboles utilisés :  
Attention: – risques de blessures corporelles  
et de dégâts matériels. Veuillez suivre les  
instructions.  
Attention: – surface à température élevée.  
Evitez le contact. La température des surfaces  
est élevée et leur contact peut provoquer des  
blessures corporelles.  
Appendix C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
229  
Attention: présence de tensions  
dangereuses. Pour éviter les risques  
délectrocution et de danger pour la santé  
physique, veuillez suivre les instructions.  
Un des symboles suivants sera peut-être utilisé en fonction du type d'interrupteur de votre système:  
MARCHE Votre système est sous tension  
(courant alternatif).  
ARRET - Votre système est hors tension  
(courant alternatif).  
VEILLEUSE – L'interrupteur  
Marche/ Veilleuse est en position « Veilleuse ».  
Modification du matériel  
Ne pas apporter de modification mécanique ou électrique au matériel. Sun Microsystems nest pas responsable de la  
conformité réglementaire dun produit Sun qui a été modifié.  
Positionnement dun produit Sun  
Attention: pour assurer le bon  
fonctionnement de votre produit Sun et pour  
l’empêcher de surchauffer, il convient de ne  
pas obstruer ni recouvrir les ouvertures  
prévues dans lappareil. Un produit Sun ne  
doit jamais être placé à proximité dun  
radiateur ou dune source de chaleur.  
Attention: – Le niveau de pression acoustique  
au poste de travail s'élève selon la norme DIN  
45 635 section 1000, à 70 dB (A) ou moins.  
Conformité SELV  
Sécurité : les raccordements E/ S sont conformes aux normes SELV.  
230 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connexion du cordon dalimentation  
Attention: – les produits Sun sont conçus  
pour fonctionner avec des alimentations  
monophasées munies dun conducteur neutre  
mis à la terre. Pour écarter les risques  
délectrocution, ne pas brancher de produit  
Sun dans un autre type dalimentation secteur.  
En cas de doute quant au type dalimentation  
électrique du local, veuillez vous adresser au  
directeur de lexploitation ou à un électricien  
qualifié.  
Attention: – tous les cordons dalimentation  
nont pas forcément la même puissance  
nominale en matière de courant. Les rallonges  
dusage domestique noffrent pas de  
protection contre les surcharges et ne sont pas  
prévues pour les systèmes dordinateurs. Ne  
pas utiliser de rallonge dusage domestique  
avec votre produit Sun.  
Attention: – votre produit Sun a été livré  
équipé dun cordon dalimentation à trois fils  
(avec prise de terre). Pour écarter tout risque  
délectrocution, branchez toujours ce cordon  
dans une prise mise à la terre.  
Attention: débranchez tous les cordons pour  
couper lalimentation du système.  
L'avertissement suivant s'applique uniquement aux systèmes équipés d'un interrupteur VEILLEUSE:  
Attention: – le commutateur dalimentation  
de ce produit fonctionne comme un dispositif  
de mise en veille uniquement. Cest la prise  
dalimentation qui sert à mettre le produit  
hors tension. Veillez donc à installer le produit  
à proximité dune prise murale facilement  
accessible. Ne connectez pas la prise  
dalimentation lorsque le châssis du système  
nest plus alimenté.  
Appendix C  
Safety Precautions  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Batterie au lithium  
Attention: – sur les cartes CPU Sun, une  
batterie au lithium (référence MK48T59Y,  
MK48TXXB-XX, MK48T18-XXXPCZ,  
M48T59W-XXXPCZ, ou MK48T08.) a été  
moulée dans lhorloge temps réel SGS. Les  
batteries ne sont pas des pièces remplaçables  
par le client. Elles risquent dexploser en cas  
de mauvais traitement. Ne pas jeter la batterie  
au feu. Ne pas la démonter ni tenter de la  
recharger.  
Couvercle  
Pour ajouter des cartes, de la mémoire, ou des unités de stockage internes, vous devrez démonter le couvercle de  
l’unité système Sun. Ne pas oublier de remettre ce couvercle en place avant de mettre le système sous tension.  
Attention: – il est dangereux de faire  
fonctionner un produit Sun sans le couvercle  
en place. Si l’on néglige cette précaution, on  
encourt des risques de blessures corporelles et  
de dégâts matériels.  
Conformité aux certifications Laser  
Les produits Sun qui font appel aux technologies lasers sont conformes aux normes de la classe 1 en la matière.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Klasse 1 Laser Apparat  
Laser KLasse 1  
CD-ROM  
Attention: – L’utilisation de contrôles, de  
réglages ou de performances de procédures  
autre que celle spécifiée dans le présent  
document peut provoquer une exposition à  
des radiations dangereuses.  
232 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normativas de seguridad  
El siguiente texto incluye las medidas de seguridad que se deben seguir cuando se instale algún producto de Sun  
Microsystems.  
Precauciones de seguridad  
Para su protección observe las siguientes medidas de seguridad cuando manipule su equipo:  
Siga todas los avisos e instrucciones marcados en el equipo.  
Asegúrese de que el voltaje y la frecuencia de la red eléctrica concuerdan con las descritas en las etiquetas de  
especificaciones eléctricas del equipo.  
No introduzca nunca objetos de ningún tipo a través de los orificios del equipo. Pueden haber voltajes  
peligrosos. Los objetos extraños conductores de la electricidad pueden producir cortocircuitos que provoquen  
un incendio, descargas eléctricas o daños en el equipo.  
mbolos  
En este libro aparecen los siguientes símbolos:  
Precaución – Existe el riesgo de lesiones  
personales y daños al equipo. Siga las  
instrucciones.  
Precaución – Superficie caliente. Evite el  
contacto. Las superficies están calientes y  
pueden causar daños personales si se tocan.  
Precaución Voltaje peligroso presente. Para  
reducir el riesgo de descarga y daños para la  
salud siga las instrucciones.  
Según el tipo de interruptor de encendido que su equipo tenga, es posible que se utilice uno de los siguientes símbolos:  
Encendido – Aplica la alimentación de CA al  
sistema.  
Apagado - Elimina la alimentación de CA del  
sistema.  
En espera – El interruptor de Encendido/ En  
espera se ha colocado en la posición de En  
espera.  
Appendix C  
Safety Precautions  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modificaciones en el equipo  
No realice modificaciones de tipo mecánico o eléctrico en el equipo. Sun Microsystems no se hace responsable del  
cumplimiento de las normativas de seguridad en los equipos Sun modificados.  
Ubicación de un producto Sun  
Precaución – Para asegurar la fiabilidad de  
funcionamiento de su producto Sun y para  
protegerlo de sobrecalentamien-tos no deben  
obstruirse o taparse las rejillas del equipo. Los  
productos Sun nunca deben situarse cerca de  
radiadores o de fuentes de calor.  
Precaución – De acuerdo con la norma DIN 45  
635, Parte 1000, se admite un nivel de presión  
acústica para puestos de trabajo máximo de  
70Db(A).  
Cumplimiento de la normativa SELV  
El estado de la seguridad de las conexiones de entrada/ salida cumple los requisitos de la normativa SELV.  
Conexión del cable de alimentación eléctrica  
Precaución – Los productos Sun están  
diseñados para trabajar en una red eléctrica  
monofásica con toma de tierra. Para reducir el  
riesgo de descarga eléctrica, no conecte los  
productos Sun a otro tipo de sistema de  
alimentación eléctrica. Póngase en contacto  
con el responsable de mantenimiento o con un  
electricista cualificado si no está seguro del  
sistema de alimentación eléctrica del que se  
dispone en su edificio.  
Precaución No todos los cables de  
alimentación eléctrica tienen la misma  
capacidad. Los cables de tipo doméstico no  
están provistos de protecciones contra  
sobrecargas y por tanto no son apropiados  
para su uso con computadores. No utilice  
alargadores de tipo doméstico para conectar  
sus productos Sun.  
Precaución – Con el producto Sun se  
proporciona un cable de alimentación con  
toma de tierra. Para reducir el riesgo de  
descargas eléctricas conéctelo siempre a un  
enchufe con toma de tierra.  
234 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precaución – Para eliminar completamente la  
alimentación de esta unidad, desconecte todos  
los cables de alimentación.  
La siguiente advertencia se aplica solamente a equipos con un interruptor de encendido que tenga una posición "En  
espera":  
Precaución – El interruptor de encendido de  
este producto funciona exclusivamente como  
un dispositivo de puesta en espera. El enchufe  
de la fuente de alimentación está diseñado  
para ser el elemento primario de desconexión  
del equipo. El equipo debe instalarse cerca del  
enchufe de forma que este último pueda ser  
fácil y rápidamente accesible. No conecte el  
cable de alimentación cuando se ha retirado la  
fuente de alimentación del chasis del sistema.  
Batería de litio  
Precaución – En las placas de CPU Sun hay  
una batería de litio insertada en el reloj de  
tiempo real, tipo SGS Núm. MK48T59Y,  
MK48TXXB-XX, MK48T18-XXXPCZ,  
M48T59W-XXXPCZ, o MK48T08. Las baterías  
no son elementos reemplazables por el propio  
cliente. Pueden explotar si se manipulan de  
forma errónea. No arroje las baterías al fuego.  
No las abra o intente recargarlas.  
Tapa de la unidad del sistema  
Debe quitar la tapa del sistema cuando sea necesario añadir tarjetas, memoria o dispositivos de almacenamiento  
internos. Asegúrese de cerrar la tapa superior antes de volver a encender el equipo.  
Precaución – Es peligroso hacer funcionar los  
productos Sun sin la tapa superior colocada.  
El hecho de no tener en cuenta esta precaución  
puede ocasionar daños personales o  
perjudicar el funcionamiento del equipo.  
Appendix C  
Safety Precautions  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aviso de cumplimiento con requisitos de láser  
Los productos Sun que utilizan la tecnología de láser cumplen con los requisitos de láser de Clase 1.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Klasse 1 Laser Apparat  
Laser KLasse 1  
CD-ROM  
Precaución – El manejo de los controles, los  
ajustes o la ejecución de procedimientos  
distintos a los aquí especificados pueden  
exponer al usuario a radiaciones peligrosas.  
236 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GOST-R Certification Mark  
Nordic Lithium Battery Cautions  
Norge  
ADVARSEL – Litiumbatteri —  
Eksplosjonsfare.Ved utskifting benyttes kun  
batteri som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.  
Brukt batteri returneres apparatleverandøren.  
Sverige  
VARNING – Explosionsfara vid felaktigt  
batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller  
en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av  
apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri  
enligt fabrikantens instruktion.  
Danmark  
ADVARSEL! – Litiumbatteri —  
Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.  
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme  
fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri  
tilbage til leverandøren.  
Suomi  
VAROITUS – Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on  
virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo  
ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan  
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan  
ohjeiden mukaisesti.  
Appendix C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
237  
 
238 Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
AC Present LED (power supply), 173  
BMC Patrol, See third-party monitoring tools  
accounts  
RSC, 191  
Ethernet, 174  
address  
2
firmware, OpenBoot, 149  
alphanumeric terminal  
attaching, 133  
baud verification, 132  
IEEE 1275-compatible, 85  
auto-boot?configuration variable, 49, 56, 82  
cables  
auto-boot-on-error?configuration  
variable, 56, 82  
central processing unit, See CPU  
automatic system recovery (ASR), 21  
deconfiguring devices manually, 60, 162  
overview, 55  
clearance specifications, 220  
clock speed (CPU), 98  
concatenation of disks, 67  
configuration script, RSC, 191  
B
back panel  
console  
illustration, 16  
enabling SC as, 161  
baud rate, 133, 134  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
console, system, 3  
CPU  
displaying information about, 98  
master, 78, 80  
LEDs, 14  
Activity, described, 14  
Fault, described, 14  
OK-to-Remove, 14  
locating drive bays, 45  
D
data bus, Sun Fire V480, 75  
device paths, hardware, 87, 88, 92  
device tree  
Solaris, displaying, 94  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions, 120  
how to put server in, 170  
error messages  
correctable ECC error, 24  
log file, 20  
disabling, 78  
diagnostic tools  
/etc/remotefile, how to modify, 131  
informal, 73, 93, 172  
LEDs, 17  
using multiple interfaces, 145  
diag-out-consoleconfiguration variable, 83  
DIMMs (dual inline memory modules), 28  
groups, illustrated, 29  
Ethernet cable, attaching, 127  
Ethernet Link Up LED  
described, 17  
disk configuration  
concatenation, 67  
hot plug, 45  
exercising the system  
FRU coverage (table), 106  
with Hardware Diagnostic Suite, 108  
hot spares, 68  
240  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
with SunVTS, 106, 202  
externally initiated reset (XIR), 51, 127  
described, 23  
manual command, 23  
front panel  
LEDs, 13  
locks, 12  
F
fan  
hardware revision level, 97  
Fan Tray 0 LED  
described, 14  
manufacturer, 97  
not isolated by diagnostic tools (table), 101  
part number, 97  
POST and, 81  
LEDs, 14  
fans  
See also fan tray assembly  
graceful halt, 50, 127  
Fault LED  
defined, 41  
hardware jumpers, 36  
serial port, 45  
features, 42  
Hardware Diagnostic Suite, 104  
high-speed serial data connector (HSSDC)  
port, 43  
host adapters, 44  
configuration rules, 44  
isolating faults in cables, 101  
about exercising the system with, 108  
hardware jumpers, 36  
hardware revision, displaying with showrev, 98  
hardware watchdog  
described, 23  
Index  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
host adapter (probe-scsi), 91  
DC Present (power supply), 173  
Activity, described, 14  
Ethernet, 17  
Ethernet Activity  
Ethernet Link Up  
I
2
I C bus, 20  
2
I C device addresses (table), 111  
IDE bus, 92  
IDPROM  
function of, 79  
Fault, 14  
initcommand (Solaris), 50, 127  
interpreting error messages  
OK-to-Remove (disk drive), 174  
2
I C tests, 89  
OpenBoot Diagnostics tests, 88  
POST, 80  
isolating faults, 100  
FRU coverage (table), 100  
J
jumpers, 36  
link integrity test, 146, 149  
flash PROM, 36  
PCI riser board identification, 36  
described, 13, 14  
operating, 168  
L
log files, 93, 103  
L1-A keyboard combination, 51, 127  
logical unit number (probe-scsi), 91  
logical view (Sun Management Center), 104  
loop ID (probe-scsi), 91  
LEDs  
AC Present (power supply), 173  
Activity (disk drive), 174  
Activity (Ethernet), 174  
back panel, 17  
242  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
manual hardware reset, 127  
memory interleaving, 30  
monitor, attaching, 136  
controlling, 85  
monitoring the system  
with RSC, 190  
moving the system, precautions, 122  
testcommand, 87  
MPxIO (multiplexed I/ O)  
features, 21  
N
OpenBoot firmware, 54, 119, 143, 150, 153, 168, 186  
defined, 78  
network  
name server, 149  
types, 4  
OpenBoot variable settings, 141  
installing, 5  
suspending, 50  
output-deviceconfiguration variable, 84, 165  
overtemperature condition  
determining with RSC, 195  
O
okprompt  
OK-to-Remove LED  
disk drive, 174  
power supply, 173  
parts  
OpenBoot commands  
dangers of, 50  
.env, 90  
printenv, 90  
probe-ide, 92  
show-devs, 92  
frame buffer card, 136  
OpenBoot configuration variables  
auto-boot?, 56  
auto-boot-on-error?, 56  
diag-switch?, 58, 165  
diag-trigger, 58  
device names, 60  
PCI riser board  
displaying with printenv, 90  
input-device, 165  
jumper functions, 37  
PCI riser board jumpers, 36, 38  
output-device, 165  
purpose of, 79, 82  
physical specifications, 217  
physical view (Sun Management Center), 104  
Index  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
isolating faults in, 101  
POST, 74  
criteria for passing, 79  
defined, 78  
manual hardware, 127  
post-triggerconfiguration variable, 84  
power  
specifications, 218  
RSC (Remote System Control), 22  
accounts, 191  
features, 22  
Power button, 15  
graphical interface, starting, 192  
invoking xircommand from, 23, 127  
main screen, 193  
LEDs, 17  
monitoring with, 190  
redundancy, 20  
explained, 49  
Power/ OK LED, 173  
described, 14  
(illustration), 76  
(OpenBoot), 90  
processor speed, displaying, 98  
prtconfcommand (Solaris), 94  
prtdiagcommand (Solaris), 94  
about, 45  
connecting to, 134  
server installation, 2, 5  
R
server media kit, contents of, 5  
service access specifications, 220  
service-mode?configuration variable, 58, 84  
reconfiguration boot, initiating, 138  
reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS), 19,  
22  
244  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
shipping (what you should receive), 1  
show-devscommand, 60, 151  
shutdown, 125  
Solaris commands  
fsck, 51  
system control switch, 15  
illustration, 15  
halt, 50, 127  
init, 50, 127  
prtconf, 94  
prtdiag, 94  
settings, 16  
See also ALOM  
agency compliance, 220  
FRU coverage (table), 106  
electrical, 218  
system LEDs, 14  
isolating faults with, 172  
status LEDs  
Stop-D keyboard combination, 54  
Stop-F keyboard combination, 55  
stress testing, See also exercising the system, 106  
terminal, baud verification, 132  
Sun Fire V480 server  
tests), 88  
test-argsvariable, 86  
Sun Management Center  
keywords for (table), 86  
tracking systems informally with, 104  
thermistors, 20  
Sun Remote System Control, See RSC  
third-party monitoring tools, 104  
tipconnection, 129  
Sun Validation and Test Suite, See SunVTS  
SunVTS  
checking if installed, 206  
Index  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tivoli Enterprise Console, See third-party  
monitoring tools  
tree, device, 103  
defined, 85  
U
uadmincommand (Solaris), 50, 127  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports  
about, 46  
connecting to, 46  
V
/var/adm/messagesfile, 93  
/var/crashdirectory, 157  
voltages, displaying system, 90  
W
warnings and cautions, 221, 237  
watchdog, hardware  
World Wide Name (probe-scsi), 91  
X
XIR (externally initiated reset), 51, 127  
described, 23  
manual command, 23  
246  
Sun Fire V490 Server Administration Guide • August 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Headphones RI 100 User Manual
Sharp TV Video Accessories AN3DG30 User Manual
Snell Acoustics Speaker ICS Sub 24 User Manual
Sony Digital Camera 4 170 840 111 User Manual
Sony Home Theater System DAV FX900W User Manual
Sony Projector VPL PX21 User Manual
Sony Stereo Receiver STR DG1100 User Manual
State Industries Electric Heater 40 DHMS User Manual
Sungale Digital Photo Frame PF803 User Manual
Sylvania Flat Panel Television lc190ss2 User Manual